Sharp All in One Printer MX M550N User Manual

MODEL  
MX-M550U  
MX-M620U  
MX-M700U  
MX-M550N  
MX-M620N  
MX-M700N  
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL  
SYSTEM  
OPERATION MANUAL  
(for general information and copier operation)  
Page  
PART 1: GENERAL INFORMATION  
BEFORE USING  
1-1  
2-1  
3-1  
THE PRODUCT  
MANAGING THE MACHINE  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
PART 2: COPIER OPERATION  
MAKING COPIES  
CONVENIENT COPY  
FUNCTIONS  
4-1  
5-1  
6-1  
MACHINE MAINTENANCE  
(FOR COPYING)  
DOCUMENT FILING  
7-1  
8-1  
FUNCTION  
SPECIFICATIONS  
Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to  
gain the maximum benefit from the product.  
Before installing this product, be sure to read the  
installatio n requirement s and cautions sections.  
Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference  
including this manual, the "Operation manual (for general  
information and copier operation)" and operation manuals  
for any optional equipment which has been installed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademark acknowledgments  
The following trademarks and registered trademarks are used in conjunction with the machine and its peripheral devices and  
accessories.  
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
®
• Microsoft , Windows , Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server  
®
2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other  
countries.  
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple  
Computer, Inc.  
• Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.  
• Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe  
Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries.  
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.  
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.  
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.  
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.  
Candid and Taffy are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may  
be registered in certain jurisdictions. CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv,  
Garamond and Halbfett Kursiv are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Albertus,  
Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype Corporation registered in the United  
States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph,  
Mona Lisa, Zapf Chancery and Zapf Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the United  
States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Clarendon, Eurostile, Helvetica, Optima,  
Palatino, Stempel Garamond, Times and Univers are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG, which may be registered  
in certain jurisdictions, exclusively licensed through Linotype Library GmbH, a wholly owned subsidiary of Heidelberger  
Druckmaschinen AG. Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Monaco and New York are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. and may  
be registered in certain jurisdictions. HGGothicB, HGMinchoL, HGPGothicB and HGPMinchoL are trademarks of Ricoh  
Company, Ltd. and may be registered in some jurisdictions. Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries. Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of Arthur Baker and may be registered in some  
jurisdictions. Antique Olive is a trademark of Marcel Olive and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Hoefler Text is a trademark  
of Johnathan Hoefler and may be registered in some jurisdictions. ITC is a trademark of International Typeface Corporation  
registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Agfa is a trademark  
of the Agfa-Gevaert Group and may be registered in certain jurisdictions. Intellifont, MicroType and UFST are trademarks of  
Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.  
Macintosh and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and  
other countries. PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated and may be registered in some jurisdictions. HP, PCL,  
FontSmart and LaserJet are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company and may be registered in some jurisdictions. The Type 1  
processor resident in Monotype Imaging's UFST product is under license from Electronics For Imaging, Inc. All other trademarks  
are the property of their respective owners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part 1: General Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NOTES  
Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual. If you have any comments or concerns about the  
manual, please contact your nearest authorised service representative.  
This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures. In the unlikely event that a defect  
or other problem is discovered, please contact your dealer or nearest authorised service representative.  
Aside from instances provided for by law, SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the  
product or its options, or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options, or other failures, or for  
any damage that occurs due to use of the product.  
Warranty  
While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible, SHARP Corporation makes  
no warranty of any kind with regard to its content. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. SHARP  
is not responsible for any loss or damages, direct or indirect, arising from or related to the use of this operation manual.  
© Copyright SHARP Corporation 2007. All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior  
written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under copyright laws.  
The display screens, messages, and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine  
due to product improvements and modifications.  
OPERATION MANUALS  
The following operation manuals are provided for the machine. Please read the appropriate manuals as needed for  
the features you wish to learn about.  
Operation manual (for general information and copier operation) (this manual)  
The first half of this manual provides general information about the machine, including safety information, loading  
paper, removing misfeeds, and regular maintenance.  
The second half of the manual explains how to use the copy and document filing functions.  
Administrator settings guide  
The administrator settings are used by the administrator of the machine to configure functions to meet the needs  
of your workplace.  
This guide explains administrator settings for machine management, copying, and document filing. Administrator  
settings for the fax, printer, network scanner and Internet fax functions are explained in the manuals for those  
functions.  
Software setup guide  
This manual mainly explains how to install and configure the software that allows the machine to be used as a  
printer.  
1
Operation manual (for printer)*  
This manual explains the procedures for using the machine as a printer.  
1
Operation manual (for image send)*  
This manual explains the procedures for using the image send feature of the machine, including the network  
scanner and Internet fax functions.  
2
To use the network scanner function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state* and the  
network scanner expansion kit must be installed.  
2
To use the Internet fax function, the network function of the machine must be in a useable state* and the network  
scanner expansion kit and the Internet fax expansion kit must be installed.  
1
* The Operation manual (for printer) and the Operation manual (for image send) are provided as PDF files in the  
CD-ROM.  
These manuals are not provided as printed manuals.  
* On the MX-M550U/M620U/M700U, the network expansion kit is required.  
2
0-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS  
Improper installation may damage this product. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the  
machine is moved.  
1.The machine should be installed near an  
accessible power outlet for easy connection.  
2.Be sure to connect the power cord only to a  
power outlet that meets the specified voltage and  
current requirements. Also make certain the  
outlet is properly grounded.  
For the power supply requirements, see the  
name plate on the back of the main unit.  
3.Do not install your machine in areas that are:  
damp, humid, or very dusty  
exposed to direct sunlight  
poorly ventilated  
subject to extreme temperature or humidity  
changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.  
4.Be sure to allow the required space around the  
machine for servicing and proper ventilation.  
30cm  
(11-13/16")  
15cm  
(6-1/8")  
60cm  
(23-5/8")  
A small amount of ozone is produced within the printer during operation. The emission level is insufficient to cause  
any health hazard.  
NOTE:  
3
The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0.1 ppm (0.2 mg/m ) calculated as an 8 hr. time-  
weighted average concentration.  
However, since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor, it is advisable to place the copier  
in a ventilated area.  
0-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CAUTIONS  
1.Do not touch the photoconductive drum. Scratches or smudges on the  
drum will cause dirty prints.  
2.The fusing unit is extremely hot. Exercise care in this area.  
3.Do not look directly at the light source. Doing so may damage your  
eyes.  
Fusing unit  
4.Four adjusters are provided on all optional stand/paper drawer units.  
These adjusters should be lowered until they contact the floor.  
When moving the machine with the optional stand/paper drawer, be  
sure to raise the adjusters. Also, unlock the two casters at the front of  
the optional stand/paper drawer. After moving the machine, lower the  
four adjusters until they reach the floor and lock the two casters.  
5.Do not make any modifications to this machine. Doing so may result in  
personal injury or damage to the machine.  
Adjuster  
6.Since this machine is heavy, it is recommended that it be moved by  
more than one person to prevent injury.  
7.When connecting this machine to a computer, be sure to first turn both  
the computer and the machine off.  
Lock  
Release  
8.Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law.  
The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national  
law. Other items may be prohibited by local law.  
Money  
Stamps  
Bonds  
Stocks  
Bank drafts Checks  
Passports  
Driver's licences  
Caution:  
This connector (A) is only intended for service purposes.  
Any connection to this terminal may cause malfunctions of the machine.  
Instruction for service technician:  
The cable length for the service terminal has to be less than 3m (118").  
(A)  
The machine includes the document filing function, which stores document image data on the machine's hard disk.  
Stored documents can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed. If a hard disk failure occurs, it will no  
longer be possible to call up the stored document data. To prevent the loss of important documents in the unlikely  
event of a hard disk failure, keep the originals of important documents or store the original data elsewhere.  
With the exception of instances provided for by law, Sharp Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages  
or loss due to the loss of stored document data.  
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"  
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED  
OF PROPERLY. PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED SERVICE  
REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY.  
This product utilizes tin-lead solder, and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury.  
Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations.  
For disposal or recycling information, please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance:  
www.eia.org  
0-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CAUTIONS  
Laser Information  
Wave length  
+10 nm  
-15 nm  
785 nm  
Pulse times  
North America:  
Europe:  
Max 0.8 mW  
55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.1 µs 3.1 ns)/7 mm  
70 cpm model: (2.7 µs 2.7 ns)/7 mm  
55 cpm / 62 cpm model: (3.7 µs 3.7 ns)/7 mm  
70 cpm model: (3.2 µs 3.2 ns)/7 mm  
Output power  
At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.8 MILLIWATT PLUS 10 % and is maintained  
constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC).  
Caution  
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous  
radiation exposure.  
For North America:  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS  
This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH standards. This  
means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation. For your safety, observe the precautions below.  
Do not remove the cabinet, operation panel or any other covers.  
The equipment's exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches. Do not bypass any safety interlock by  
inserting wedges or other items into switch slots.  
For Europe:  
CAUTION  
VAROITUS!  
LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN  
MUULLA KUIN TÄSSÄ  
KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA  
MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA  
ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN  
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1  
YLITTÄVÄLLE  
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
LASER KLASSE 1  
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION  
WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS  
DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE  
TO BEAM.  
VORSICHT  
UNSICHTBARE  
LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN  
ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND  
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG  
ÜBERBRÜCKT. NICHT DEM  
STRAHL AUSSETZEN.  
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE  
LASERSÄTEILYLLE.  
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE  
KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT  
VARNING  
OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ  
ANNAT SÄTT ÄN I DENNA  
BRUKSANVISNING  
ADVARSEL  
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING  
VED ÅBNING, NÅR  
SPECIFICERATS, KAN  
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER  
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ  
UDSAETTELSE FOR  
ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS FÖR  
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING,  
SOM ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN  
FÖR LASERKLASS 1.  
STRÅLNING.  
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.  
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.  
CAUTION  
CLASS 1  
LASER PRODUCT  
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND  
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERERÜCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.  
VORSICHT  
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING, NÅR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER  
UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR STRÅLNING.  
ADVARSEL  
ADVERSEL  
USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES OG SIKKERHEDSLÅS BRYTES.  
UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN.  
LASER KLASSE 1  
OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRRAR ÄR  
URKOPPLADE. STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG. BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN.  
VARNING  
Laserstrahl  
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYMÄTÖNTÄ  
LASERSÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KATSO SÄTEESEEN.  
VARO!  
0-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTENTS  
OPERATION MANUALS ..............................................0-1  
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS...............................0-2  
CAUTIONS...................................................................0-3  
Laser Information .................................................0-4  
CONTENTS .................................................................0-5  
Page  
Part names ...........................................................3-2  
Specifications .......................................................3-2  
Finishing methods ................................................3-4  
removal.................................................................3-7  
Removing a misfeed.............................................3-11  
problems...............................................................3-13  
INSERTER ...................................................................3-14  
Part names ...........................................................3-14  
Specifications .......................................................3-14  
Loading paper.......................................................3-15  
Manual operation of the inserter...........................3-15  
Misfeed removal ...................................................3-17  
SHARP OSA.................................................................3-19  
INTRODUCTION..........................................................1-2  
MAIN FEATURES ........................................................1-3  
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS................................1-10  
Exterior.................................................................1-10  
Interior..................................................................1-11  
Operation panel....................................................1-13  
Touch panel..........................................................1-14  
AUDITING MODE ........................................................1-18  
enabled.................................................................1-18  
AMX2)...........................................................................3-19  
Standard application setup...................................3-19  
Selecting a standard application...........................3-19  
Operation in OSA mode .......................................3-20  
LOADING PAPER ........................................................2-2  
Identifying the trays ..............................................2-2  
Loading paper in paper tray 3 ..............................2-5  
capacity tray AR-LC6)..................................................2-7  
capacity tray AR-LC7)..................................................2-8  
Loading paper in the bypass tray .........................2-10  
loaded ..................................................................2-17  
SYSTEM SETTINGS ...................................................2-18  
About the settings ................................................2-20  
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...........................................2-22  
MISFEED REMOVAL...................................................2-23  
Misfeed removal guidance....................................2-23  
exit area................................................................2-24  
Misfeed in the duplex unit.....................................2-25  
Misfeed in the paper feed area.............................2-26  
REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED.........................2-31  
document feeder ..................................................2-31  
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................2-32  
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER............................4-2  
Acceptable originals .............................................4-2  
PLACING ORIGINALS .................................................4-3  
Manually setting the scanning size.......................4-5  
SIZES ...........................................................................4-6  
NORMAL COPYING.....................................................4-7  
feeding function ....................................................4-7  
document feeding function....................................4-10  
Copying from the document glass ........................4-11  
glass .....................................................................4-13  
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE....................................4-14  
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM........................4-15  
Automatic selection (auto image) .........................4-15  
XY ZOOM.............................................................4-18  
SPECIAL PAPERS .......................................................4-20  
0-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CONTENTS  
SPECIAL MODES ........................................................5-2  
Margin shift...........................................................5-3  
Erase ....................................................................5-4  
Dual page copy.....................................................5-5  
Pamphlet copy......................................................5-6  
Job build ...............................................................5-8  
Tandem copy ........................................................5-10  
Covers/inserts.......................................................5-12  
Multi shot ..............................................................5-24  
Book copy.............................................................5-26  
Tab copy ...............................................................5-27  
Card shot ................................................................. 5-29  
Mirror image .........................................................5-31  
B/W reverse..........................................................5-31  
Print menu ............................................................5-32  
SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................... 8-2  
INDEX.......................................................................... 8-4  
PROGRAMS.................................................................5-44  
Storing a job program...........................................5-44  
Calling up a job program ......................................5-45  
Deleting a stored job program ..............................5-45  
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN ...................................5-46  
USER MAINTENANCE ................................................6-2  
document feeder...................................................6-2  
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................6-3  
OVERVIEW ..................................................................7-2  
Document filing function .......................................7-2  
A look at the operation panel................................7-4  
Saving files ...........................................................7-4  
Main screen of document filing.............................7-5  
Document filing icons ...........................................7-5  
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE..........................7-6  
Quick File..............................................................7-6  
Filing.....................................................................7-7  
Print jobs ..............................................................7-9  
Scan Save ............................................................7-10  
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE...............................7-13  
Calling up and using a saved file..........................7-15  
SYSTEM SETTINGS....................................................7-24  
folders...................................................................7-24  
ENTERING CHARACTERS .........................................7-29  
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................7-31  
0-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 1  
BEFORE USING THE  
PRODUCT  
This chapter contains basic information that should be read before using  
the product.  
Page  
INTRODUCTION..................................................................................... 1-2  
MAIN FEATURES ................................................................................... 1-3  
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS........................................................... 1-10  
Exterior............................................................................................ 1-10  
Interior............................................................................................. 1-11  
Operation panel............................................................................... 1-13  
Touch panel..................................................................................... 1-14  
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF.................................................. 1-17  
AUDITING MODE ................................................................................... 1-18  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INTRODUCTION  
Thank you for purchasing a SHARP digital multifunction copier.  
Please read this manual before using the machine. In particular, be sure to read "INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS"  
before using the machine.  
Please keep this manual close at hand for reference whenever necessary.  
This manual provides general information on using the machine, such as routine maintenance and how to load paper  
and remove misfeeds. It also explains how to use the copier and document filing functions.  
Separate manuals have been provided for the fax function, printer function, and network scanner function.  
Original and paper sizes  
This machine allows use of standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems.  
These are shown in the tables below.  
Sizes in the AB system  
Sizes in the inch system  
11" x 17" (LEDGER)  
A3  
B4  
A4  
B5  
A5  
8-1/2" x 14" (LEGAL)  
8-1/2" x 13" (FOOLSCAP)  
8-1/2" x 11" (LETTER)  
7-1/4" x 10-1/2" (EXECUTIVE)  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (INVOICE)  
The meaning of "R" in original and paper size indications  
Some original and paper sizes can be placed in either the portrait or landscape orientations. To differentiate  
between landscape and portrait, the landscape orientation size indication will contain an "R". These are indicated  
as A4R, B5R, 8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, etc. Sizes that can be placed only in the landscape orientation (A3,  
B4, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13") do not contain the "R" in their size indication.  
Landscape  
orientation  
Size indication  
without "R"  
Size indication  
with "R"  
Portrait orientation  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAIN FEATURES  
The digital multifunction copier is capable of performing a variety of functions. This page shows features related to  
the copy function.  
Sort mode  
Group mode  
2-sided Copy  
Exposure Adjustments  
Reduction/Enlargement  
See page 1-3  
See page 1-3  
See page 1-3  
Job programs  
Mirror Image  
B/W Reverse  
Date print  
See page 1-6  
See page 1-6  
See page 1-6  
See page 1-6  
See page 1-3  
See page 1-4  
Stamp  
Page numbering  
Text See page 1-7  
Interrupting a copy run  
Offset mode See page 1-7  
(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)  
Staple sort mode See page 1-7  
(When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)  
Saddle stitch See page 1-8  
(When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.)  
Hole punching See page 1-8  
(When the Punch Module is installed.)  
Inserter mode See page 1-8  
(When the Inserter is installed.)  
See page 1-7  
1
XY Zoom  
Margin Shift  
Erase  
Dual Page Copy  
Pamphlet Copy  
Job Build  
Tandem Copy  
(When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or  
MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.)  
Covers/inserts  
See page 1-4  
See page 1-4  
See page 1-4  
See page 1-7  
See page 1-7  
See page 1-4  
See page 1-4  
See page 1-5  
See page 1-5  
See page 1-5  
See page 1-5  
See page 1-5  
See page 1-5  
See page 1-6  
See page 1-6  
Transparency Insert  
Multi Shot  
Book Copy  
Tab Copy  
Card Shot  
Document filing function  
See page 1-8  
Sort  
See page 4-9  
2-sided Copy  
Copies can be collated.  
Copy onto both sides of the paper using the document  
glass or the automatic document feeder.  
Copy  
Original  
Original  
Copy  
Group  
See page 4-9  
Exposure Adjustments  
See page 4-14  
Copies can be grouped by page.  
The desired image type for the original can be  
selected.  
Text  
Text/Photo  
Photo  
Original  
Copy  
Resolution  
Exposure  
ABCDE  
ABCDE  
Lighter  
Darker  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
MAIN FEATURES  
Reduction / Enlargement  
See page 4-15  
Erase  
See page 5-4  
Copies can be enlarged or reduced to the desired  
size.  
Shadows that appear around the edges of copies of  
books or thick originals can be erased.  
Original  
Copy  
Original  
Copy  
Edge erase  
Centre erase  
Enlargement  
Reduction  
Edge+Centre  
erase  
XY Zoom  
See page 4-18  
Dual Page Copy  
See page 5-5  
Separate ratio settings can be selected for the  
length and width of a copy.  
The left and right pages of a book can be  
successively copied onto separate sheets.  
Original  
Copy  
Book original  
Copy  
Margin Shift  
Margins can be added to copies.  
See page 5-3  
Pamphlet Copy  
See page 5-6  
One-sided or two-sided pamphlet style copies can  
be made.  
One-sided copying Image shifted Image shifted  
Original  
to the right  
to the left  
Originals (one-sided)  
Finished copies are  
folded in two.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Left binding  
Margin  
Two-sided copying  
Original  
Margin  
First page  
First page  
Originals (two-sided)  
2
4
6
8
Image shifted  
to the right  
Image shifted  
to the left  
Right binding  
1
3
5
7
Or  
Margin  
Margin  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
MAIN FEATURES  
See page 5-23  
Job Build  
See page 5-8  
Transparency Insert  
When you have a very large number of originals, the  
pages can be scanned in sets.  
Inserts can be automatically inserted between  
transparencies.  
Originals (1-sided)  
Copy  
1
Originals (2-sided)  
Insert sheets  
300 sheets  
150 sheets 150 sheets  
Tandem Copy  
See page 5-10  
Multi Shot  
See page 5-24  
Two machines can be used to run a large copy job  
in parallel.  
Multiple original pages can be copied onto a  
single sheet of paper in a uniform layout.  
Originals  
(1-sided)  
Originals  
(2-sided)  
Copy  
100 sets of  
copies  
50 sets of  
copies  
50 sets of  
copies  
*When using the MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or  
MX-M700U, the network expansion kit is required.  
Covers/inserts  
See page 5-12  
Book Copy  
See page 5-26  
Front covers, back covers, and inserts can be  
added. These can also be copied on.  
Books and other bound originals can be copied  
pamphlet style.  
Original  
Copy  
Originals  
Left binding  
Back cover  
First page  
First page  
First page  
First page  
Front cover  
Insert sheets  
Right binding  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
MAIN FEATURES  
Tab Copy  
See page 5-27  
Mirror Image  
See page 5-31  
Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper.  
A mirror image copy can be made.  
Original  
Tab paper  
Copy  
Original  
Copy  
Tab width  
A4 : Maximum of 20mm (51/64")  
8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 17mm (5/8")  
Card Shot  
See page 5-29  
B/W Reverse  
See page 5-31  
The front and back of a card can be copied onto  
one sheet of paper.  
White and black can be inverted on a copy to  
produce a negative image.  
This function is convenient for making copies for  
certification purposes and helps save paper.  
Original  
Copy  
Original  
Copy  
CARD  
CARD  
Front of  
card  
CARD  
Back of  
card  
Example:  
Portrait  
A4 (8-1/2") size  
Example:  
Landscape  
A4 (8-1/2") size  
Date  
See page 5-35  
Job programs  
See page 5-44  
The date can be added to copies.  
Various steps of a copy operation can be stored  
as a program, and up to 10 programs can be  
stored. Saving frequently used sets of settings in a  
program saves you the trouble of selecting those  
settings each time you wish to use them.  
JOB PROGRAMS  
2010/APR/4  
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.  
RECALL  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
MAIN FEATURES  
See page 5-46  
Stamp  
See page 5-36  
Interrupting a copy run  
Reverse text can be added to copies ("stamp").  
A copy job in progress can be interrupted for a  
rush job.  
INTERRUPT  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
1
AUTO  
EXPOSUR  
CONFIDENTIAL  
A4  
AUTO  
A4  
Offset mode  
See page 3-4  
Page numbering  
See page 5-37  
Each set of output can be offset slightly from other  
sets for easy separation.  
Page numbers can be added to copies.  
Offset mode  
Non-Offset mode  
*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is  
installed.  
Staple sort mode  
See page 3-4  
Text  
See page 5-41  
Sets of copies can be automatically stapled.  
Entered text can be added to copies.  
Original  
Copy  
Meeting  
*When the Finisher or Saddle stitch finisher is  
installed.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
MAIN FEATURES  
Saddle stitch  
See page 3-5  
Document filing function  
See chap. 7  
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies  
can be automatically folded in half and stapled at  
the fold. (Use with the pamphlet function (see  
page 5-6) or book copy function (see page 5-26).)  
A document image can be stored on the hard disk.  
A stored file can easily be called up and printed or  
transmitted.  
Saddle stitch binding  
Printed  
Document  
Image  
HDD  
Transmitted  
Save to  
machine's  
hard disk  
Call up a  
saved file to  
reuse  
6
7
*When the Saddle stitch finisher is installed.  
Hole punching  
See page 3-5  
Copies can be punched to add holes.  
Original  
Punch positions  
*When the Punch module is installed.  
Inserter mode  
See page 3-14  
Blank or already printed-on sheets of paper can  
be added as a cover or an insert without being  
printed on. The inserter can be used to feed heavy  
sheets of paper that cannot be fed from other  
trays.  
Copy  
Original  
*When the Inserter is installed.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MAIN FEATURES  
Energy saving features  
This product has the following two power reducing modes that conform to the  
Energy Star guidelines to help conserve natural resources and reduce  
environmental pollution.  
Preheat mode  
The preheat mode is the first level of power reduction. The power is reduced  
to the fuser unit a preset time after the machine has completed a job and no  
further machine operations have been performed. The machine can recover  
to the ready condition within a short period of time. The preset time to enter  
the mode can be set by a administrator settings.  
Products that have earned  
the ENERGY STAR are  
designed to protect the  
environment through  
superior energy efficiency.  
®
1
Auto power shut-off mode  
The auto power shut-off mode is the second level of power reduction. In this mode power is shut off to the  
fusing unit and the touch panel. In this state more energy is saved than in the preheat mode but the time to  
recover to the ready condition will be longer. The preset time to enter this mode can be set by a administrator  
settings.  
When this product is used as a printer, and either of the above modes is active, the mode will be deactivated  
automatically by an incoming job and the machine will automatically warm up and start to print when it has  
reached the ready temperature.  
When this product is configured for multi-function operation, and either of the above modes is active, the mode  
will be deactivated as above by an incoming print job. Either mode will also be deactivated by operation of  
DOCUMENT FILING, IMAGE SEND or COPY mode key.  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Exterior  
(AR-F15)  
*1  
1
9
Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) /  
Power switch (See page 1-17)  
*1  
Finisher (AR-F15) (See page 3-2)  
Turns the power on and off.  
If the power does not come on when the power  
switch is turned on, check the main power switch to  
see if it is turned on.  
*1  
2
3
4
Punch module (AR-PN4A) (See page 3-2)  
*1  
*1  
Inserter (AR-CF2) (See page 3-14)  
10  
11  
12  
Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC6))  
(See page 2-7)  
Automatic document feeder (See page 4-2)  
*1  
Tray 5 (Large capacity tray(AR-LC7))  
This automatically feeds and scans multiple sheet  
originals. Both sides of two-sided originals can be  
scanned at once.  
(See page 2-8)  
Tray 1-Tray 2  
The trays hold paper. Approximately 800 sheets of  
standard A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m  
5
Front cover  
2
Open to replace toner cartridge.  
(20 lbs.)) can be loaded in tray 1, and  
approximately 1200 sheets of standard A4 or  
6
7
Operation panel  
2
8-1/2" x 11" size paper (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) can be  
loaded in tray 2.  
Centre tray (See page 4-9)  
13  
14  
Tray 3  
Finished sheets are deposited here  
Tray 3 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of  
2
standard (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded  
8
Bypass tray  
in this tray. Tabbed paper and transparencies can  
also be loaded.  
Special papers (including transparency film) and  
copy paper can be fed from the bypass tray.  
Tray 4  
Tray 4 holds paper. Approximately 500 sheets of  
2
standard (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) paper can be loaded  
in this tray.  
1
2
3
10  
11  
*1  
,
,
,
and  
are peripheral devices. For information on these devices, see the explanations of the  
devices in the manual.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Interior  
1
15  
20  
21  
Duplex unit  
Right side cover  
Open this cover to remove a misfeed from the  
fusing unit area.  
Open when a misfeed has occurred in the bypass  
tray or large capacity tray.  
Upper cover of large capacity tray  
16  
Fusing unit  
Open when a misfeed has occurred in the large  
capacity tray.  
Toner images are fused here.  
CAUTION  
22  
23  
Left side cover release  
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing misfed  
paper.  
Push this knob up to open the left side cover.  
Left cover of paper drawer  
17  
Cover of the duplex unit  
Open this cover to remove paper misfed in tray 3 or  
tray 4.  
Open when a misfeed has occurred in duplex unit.  
*2  
18  
19  
Toner cartridge  
24  
Photoconductive drum  
This holds toner for printing. The toner cartridge  
must be replaced when indicated on the operation  
panel.  
Images are formed on the photoconductive drum.  
NOTE  
Do not touch or damage the photoconductive drum.  
Main power switch (See page 1-17)  
Keep this switch turned on when the fax option or  
Internet fax option is installed.  
*2 See page 2-21 for the procedure for installing and replacing the toner cartridge.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Other optional equipment  
Network expansion kit (MX-NBX1)  
Network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1)  
This kit is required to add the network scanning  
feature.  
To add the network scanner function to the  
MX-M550U, MX-M620U, or MX-M700U, the  
network expansion kit is required.  
This kit is required to add on the network function.  
When this expansion kit is installed, the machine  
can be used as a network printer.  
Barcode font kit (AR-PF1)  
This kit adds bar code fonts to the machine.  
Internet fax expansion kit (MX-FWX1)  
This kit is required to use the Internet fax function.  
To add the Internet fax function, the network  
scanner expansion kit is required.  
Data security kit (MX-FRX5)  
This kit is used to erase electronic data from the  
hard disk and memory immediately after a  
document is printed or transmitted.  
Application integration module (MX-AMX1)  
The application integration module can be  
combined with the network scanner function to  
append a metadata file to a scanned image file.  
PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1)  
This kit provides compatibility of PostScript level 3  
to the printer.  
Facsimile expansion kit (AR-FX8)  
This kit is required to add fax function.  
Application communication module (MX-AMX2)  
This allows the machine to be linked over a network  
to an external software application.  
Additional fax memory (8 MB) (AR-MM9)  
External account module (MX-AMX3)  
This is required to use an external account  
application on the machine.  
256MB expansion memory board (AR-SM5)  
This extends the memory of the machine.  
Peripheral devices are basically optional, but are incorporated in some models as standard equipment.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Operation panel  
PRINT  
READY  
DATA  
DOCUMENT  
FILING  
1
LINE  
DATA  
IMAGE SEND  
COPY  
SYSTEM  
JOB STATUS SETTINGS  
LOGOUT  
1
5
Touch panel  
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key  
The machine status, messages and touch keys are  
displayed on the panel. The document filing, copy,  
network scanner* , and fax* , Internet fax*  
functions are used by switching to the screen for  
the desired function. See the following page.  
This is used to store, edit, and delete user names  
and folder names for the document filing function,  
and to configure the administrator settings and  
printer configuration settings. (See page 7-24)  
1
2
3
6
7
Numeric keys  
2
Mode select keys and indicators  
Use to enter numeric values for various settings.  
Use to change modes and the corresponding  
display on the touch panel.  
[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)  
This key is used in copy mode, document filing  
[DOCUMENT FILING] key  
1
2
mode, network scanner mode* , fax mode* , and  
Press to select the document filing mode. (See  
page 7-5.)  
3
Internet fax mode* .  
8
9
[IMAGE SEND] key/LINE indicator/DATA  
indicator  
Press to change the display to network scanner  
[#/P] key  
This is used as a program key when using the copy  
function, and to dial when using the fax function* .  
2
1
2
3
mode* , fax mode* or Internet fax mode* . (See  
the "Operation manual (for image send)") and  
"Operation manual (for facsimile)".)  
[C] key (Clear key)  
This key is used in copy mode, document filing  
mode, network scanner mode* , fax mode* , and  
Internet fax mode* .  
1
2
[COPY] key  
Press to select the copy mode.  
3
10  
11  
[START] key  
3
PRINT mode indicators  
READY indicator  
Use this key to start copying in copy mode, scan a  
document in network scanner mode* , or scan a  
document for transmission in fax mode* or  
Internet fax mode* .  
1
Print data can be received when this indicator is  
lit.  
2
3
DATA indicator  
[CA] key (Clear all key)  
Lights up or blinks when print data is being  
received. Also lights up or blinks when printing is  
being performed.  
This key is used in copy mode, document filing  
mode, network scanner mode* , fax mode* , and  
Internet fax mode  
and perform an operation from the initial machine  
state.  
1
2
3
*
. Use the key to cancel settings  
4
[JOB STATUS] key  
Press to display the current job status. (See page  
1-15.)  
*1 When the network scanner option is installed.  
*2 When the fax option is installed.  
*3 When the Internet fax option is installed.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Touch panel  
The touch panel screens shown in this manual are  
printed images, and may appear different from the  
actual screens.  
Selecting a function  
[Example 1]  
If a key is highlighted in a  
OCK ONTO  
0
setting screen at the  
time the screen appears,  
the [OK] key can be  
pressed to store the  
selection without further  
operation.  
OK  
OK  
Using the touch panel  
[Example 1]  
CANCEL  
PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS  
YES NO  
PAPER
FROM IN
Items on the touch panel  
are easily selectable by  
touching the key  
associated with the item  
with a finger. Selection  
of an item will be  
JOB QUEUE  
COPY  
SETS / PROG  
003 / 000  
001  
003 / 000  
010 / 000  
[Example 2]  
066621122
A function in the special  
Beep  
tone  
accompanied with  
a
functions  
screen  
is  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
beep tone* to confirm  
the item was selected.  
selected by touching the  
key so that it is  
highlighted. To cancel  
the selection, touch the  
highlighted key once  
again.  
Also, the key area for the item will be highlighted  
for visual confirmation.  
TANDEM  
COPY  
* If a greyed out key is touched, a double beep will  
sound.  
Copier feature  
[Example 2]  
Keys which are greyed  
out on any screen are  
not selectable.  
Dual page copy  
Job build  
Tandem copy  
Mirror image  
B/W Reverse  
1/13  
COMPLETE  
[Example 3]  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
A
corresponding icon  
The confirmation beeps can be disabled using  
"Keys touch sound" in the administrator settings.  
(See page 10 of the administrator settings guide.)  
representing the feature  
will appear on the touch  
key and on the main  
screen of the mode  
selected. If this icon is  
touched, the setting  
screen of the function (or  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
ORIGI  
4  
2.  
B5  
FILE  
B4  
A3  
QUICK FILE  
a
menu screen) will  
appear, allowing the settings to be checked or  
adjusted and the function to be cancelled easily.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
Job status screen (common to print, scan, fax and Internet fax)  
This screen is displayed when the [JOB STATUS] key on the operation panel is pressed.  
This screen can be used to display the "JOB QUEUE" (showing stored jobs and the current job) or the  
"COMPLETE" job list (showing finished jobs). This screen is used to check jobs, move a job to the top of the JOB  
QUEUE, or delete a job.  
*1  
"COMPLETE"  
job screen  
"JOB QUEUE" screen  
1
JOB QUEUE  
COMPLETE  
JOB QUEUE  
COMPLETE  
JOB QUEUE  
COPY  
SETS / PROGRESS  
020 / 001  
STATUS  
1/1  
COPYING  
PAPER EMPTY  
COPY  
020 / 000  
020 / 000  
002 / 000  
DETAIL  
PRIORITY  
DETAIL  
Suzuki  
066211221  
WAITING  
WAITING  
STOP/DELETE  
CALL  
INTERNET-FAX  
INTERNET-FAX  
FAX JOB  
SCAN TO  
PRINT JOB  
1
Job list  
*1 "PAPER EMPTY" in the job status display  
When a job status display indicates "PAPER  
EMPTY", the specified paper size for the job is not  
loaded in any of the trays.  
The displayed jobs in the job list are themselves  
operation keys. To cancel printing or to give a job  
the highest print priority, touch the relevant job key  
to select the job and execute the desired operation  
In this case, the job will be suspended until the  
required paper is loaded. Other stored jobs will be  
printed (if possible) until the required paper is loaded.  
(Other jobs will not be printed if the paper runs out  
during printing.) If you need to change the paper size  
because the specified paper size is not available,  
8
9
using the keys described in  
and  
.
This shows the current job and the jobs waiting to  
be run. The icons to the left of the jobs in the  
queue show the job mode. The document filing  
reprint job icon is highlighted.  
Note that the icon does not become highlighted  
during retransmission of a fax/image transmission  
job.  
touch the current job key to select it and then touch  
10  
the [DETAIL] key described in  
.
2
Mode select key  
Print mode  
Copy mode  
This switches the job list display between "JOB  
QUEUE" and "COMPLETE".  
SCAN mode  
"JOB QUEUE": Shows stored jobs and the job in  
progress.  
Scan to e-mail job  
Scan to FTP job  
"COMPLETE": Shows finished jobs.  
Scan to Desktop job  
Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE"  
functions and finished broadcast transmission  
jobs appear as keys in the finished job screen.  
The "FILE" or "QUICK FILE" job keys in the  
finished job screen can be touched, followed by  
the [CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print  
or transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission  
job key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL]  
key to check the result of the transmission.  
Scan to Network folder job  
Fax mode  
Fax send job  
Fax reception job  
PC-Fax send job  
Internet Fax mode  
i-Fax send job  
i-Fax reception job  
PC-Internet Fax send job  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS  
3
9
[PRINT JOB] key  
[PRIORITY] key  
This displays the print job list of print mode  
(copying, printing, fax reception, Internet fax  
reception, and self printing).  
A stored job in the "JOB QUEUE" job list can be  
printed ahead of all other stored jobs by selecting  
the job and then touching this key.  
4
10  
[SCAN TO] key  
[DETAIL] key  
This displays the transmission status and finished  
jobs of scan mode (Scan to e-mail, Scan to FTP,  
Scan to Desktop, and Scan to Network Folder)  
when the network scanner option is installed.  
This shows detailed information on the selected  
job. Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK  
FILE"  
functions  
and  
finished  
broadcast  
transmission jobs appear as keys in the finished  
job screen. A Quick File in the finished job screen  
or the [Filing] key can be touched, followed by the  
[CALL] key, to call up a finished job and print or  
transmit it. A finished broadcast transmission job  
key can be touched followed by the [DETAIL] key to  
check the result of the transmission.  
5
[FAX JOB] key  
This displays the transmission/reception status  
and finished jobs of fax mode (fax and PC-Fax)  
when the fax option is installed.  
6
Display switching keys  
Use to switch the page of the displayed job list.  
11  
7
[CALL] key  
[INTERNET-FAX] key  
When this key is touched after selecting a job in  
the COMPLETE job status screen (a job stored  
using the FILE or QUICK FILE keys of the  
document filing function), the "JOB SETTINGS"  
menu screen appears to let you resend or reprint  
the finished job. (See "Document filing function"  
on page 7-2.)  
This displays the transmission/reception status  
and finished jobs of Internet fax mode and PC  
Internet fax mode when the Internet fax option is  
installed.  
8
[STOP/DELETE] key  
Use to cancel or delete the current job or delete  
the selected reserved job. Note that printing of  
received faxes and received Internet faxes cannot  
be cancelled or deleted.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF  
The machine has two power switches. The main power switch can be found at the upper right after the front cover  
is opened. The power switch is located at the upper left of the right side of the machine.  
The two switches are normally used as follows:  
CAUTION  
Before turning off the main power switch, make sure  
that the communication and data lights are not  
blinking on the operation panel. Turning off the main  
power switch or unplugging the power cord while the  
lights are blinking may damage the hard disk and  
cause the data being stored or received to be lost.  
"ON" position  
"OFF" position  
1
Main power switch ON, Power switch OFF  
Main power switch  
Power switch  
Set the switches in this way at night or at other times  
when the machine is not being used. The touch  
panel cannot be used, however, the following  
functions will remain operational:  
Main power switch: Normally kept in the ON position.  
(Be sure to keep ON when using the  
fax function.)  
Power switch :  
Turn to ON position before using  
the machine.  
When the fax option is installed:  
Automatic fax reception, timer transmission  
(automatic transmission at a specified time), and  
transmission when a polling request is received from  
another machine (remote transmission, relay  
broadcast transmission)  
Turn OFF at night when the  
machine is not used.  
Main power switch ON, Power switch ON  
The copy, printer, fax*, Internet fax*, network  
scanner*, and document filing functions can be  
used. If the machine is not used for a certain interval  
after turning on the power switch, the machine will  
automatically enter a reduced power consumption  
state (preheat mode or auto power shut-off mode  
(see page 1-9)).  
When the Internet fax option is installed:  
Automatic Internet fax reception  
* The required options must be installed to use  
these functions.  
Main power switch OFF, Power switch OFF  
Main power switch OFF, Power switch ON  
The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,  
and document filing functions cannot be used.  
Turn both switches off and unplug the power cord if  
you suspect a machine failure, if there is a bad  
thunderstorm nearby, or when you are moving the  
machine.  
The copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,  
and document filing functions cannot be used.  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AUDITING MODE  
Auditing mode can be enabled to keep track of the number of pages printed and transmitted (scanned) by each  
account (up to 500 accounts can be established). The page counts can be viewed and totaled as needed.  
<This mode is enabled in the administrator settings separately for the copy, printer, fax, Internet fax, network scanner,  
and document filing functions (page 7 of the administrator settings guide)>  
Using the machine when the auditing mode is enabled  
The procedure for making copies when auditing mode has been enabled for the copy function is explained below.  
NOTES  
When auditing mode is enabled for document filing and fax/image transmission, a message will appear asking  
you to enter your account number each time you switch to the main screen of one of those functions in the touch  
panel. Enter your account number in the same way as for copy mode, and then begin the scanning procedure.  
When the account counter is turned on for the printer function, you must enter your account number in the setting  
screen of the printer driver on your computer in order to print.  
When the account counter is turned on, the right  
ENTER YOUR ACCOUNT NUMBER.  
message appears on the touch panel.  
When the above screen appears, enter your 5-digit account number and then begin the copying procedure.  
Enter your account number (5 digits) with  
the numeric keys.  
Follow the appropriate steps to perform  
the copy job.  
1
2
As you enter your  
account number, the  
hyphens (-) change to  
asterisks ( ). If you  
enter an incorrect digit,  
When copying is begun, the following message  
will appear.  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
press the  
re-enter the correct digit.  
key and  
PRESS [LOGOUT] WHEN FINISHED.  
LOGOUT  
When a correct account number is entered, the  
following message will appear.  
To perform an interrupt copy job (page 5-46),  
touch the [INTERRUPT] key and then enter your  
account number as explained in step 1. The  
following message will appear.  
ACCOUNT STATUS :MADE  
COPIES  
/REMAINING  
:00,123,000/00,012,456  
COPY INTERRUPT MODE.  
OK  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
If a limit has been set in the administrator settings  
for the number of copies that can be made by the  
account, the remaining number that can be made  
is displayed.  
When the copy job is finished, press the  
[ ] key ([LOGOUT] key)  
3
Check the number in the display and touch the  
[OK] key.  
NOTE  
If "ACCOUNT NUMBER SECURITY" is enabled in the  
administrator settings and an incorrect account  
number is entered three times in a row, "PLEASE SEE  
YOUR ADMINISTRATOR FOR ASSISTANCE." will  
appear (page 8 of the administrator settings guide).  
Operation is not possible while this message  
appears (about one minute).  
LOGOUT  
1-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
CHAPTER 2  
MANAGING THE MACHINE  
This chapter explains how to load paper, replace the toner cartridge, and  
remove paper misfeeds. It also contains information about supplies.  
Page  
LOADING PAPER ................................................................................... 2-2  
Identifying the trays......................................................................... 2-2  
Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................................. 2-2  
Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2 ............................. 2-3  
Loading paper in paper tray 3 ......................................................... 2-5  
Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 ......................................... 2-5  
Changing the paper size in paper tray 4 ......................................... 2-6  
Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray AR-LC7)... 2-8  
Loading paper in the bypass tray .................................................... 2-10  
used in the trays)............................................................................. 2-12  
Setting the paper type and paper size ............................................ 2-14  
Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded...................... 2-17  
SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 2-18  
General procedure for system settings ........................................... 2-18  
About the settings ........................................................................... 2-20  
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES ............................................. 2-21  
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES ...................................................................... 2-22  
MISFEED REMOVAL.............................................................................. 2-23  
Misfeed removal guidance .............................................................. 2-23  
Misfeed in the duplex unit................................................................ 2-25  
Misfeed in the paper feed area........................................................ 2-26  
REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED ................................................... 2-31  
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 2-32  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LOADING PAPER  
If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display.  
Follow the procedure below to load paper.  
Identifying the trays  
The trays are identified using numbers as shown below.  
For the types and sizes of paper that can be used in each tray, see page 2-12.  
1
Tray 1  
This is the left large capacity tray.  
2
3
4
Tray 3  
Tray 4  
Tray 2  
This is the right large capacity tray.  
5
6
Tray 5  
This is an optional large capacity tray.  
Bypass tray  
NOTES  
Do not use curled or folded paper. Doing so may cause a misfeed.  
Do not place heavy objects or press hard on any tray which is pulled out.  
Do not place objects on the large-capacity tray. This may damage the tray or interfere with operation.  
Load paper with the print side face up. However, when the paper type is set to "PRE-PRINTED" or "LETTER  
HEAD", load the paper face down*.  
* If the two-sided function is disabled using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator settings (page 11  
of the administrator settings guide), load the paper face up.  
Loading paper in paper tray 1 - tray 2  
A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 1. A4 or 8-1/2" x 11" size paper can be loaded in tray 2. These  
are parallel large-capacity trays that allow a total of approximately 2000 sheets of SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2  
(20 lbs.)) to be loaded. If you wish to change the paper size of tray 1 or tray 2, see "Changing the paper size in paper  
tray 1 - tray 2" on the next page.  
1 Pull out paper tray 1-tray 2.  
2 Load paper in the left and right trays.  
Lift the paper guide and  
Gently pull the tray out  
until it stops.  
Indicator line  
load paper in tray 1.*1  
Approximately 800 sheets  
of SHARP standard paper  
(80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) can be  
loaded.  
Be sure to return the  
paper guide to its  
original position after  
loading the paper.  
Load paper in tray 2.*1  
Indicator line  
Approximately  
1200  
SHARP  
sheets  
of  
standard paper (80 g/m2  
(20 lbs.)) can be loaded.  
*1 The paper stack must not be higher than the indicator line.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
LOADING PAPER  
3 Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine. 4 Set the paper type.  
If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an  
inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the  
paper type was changed, be sure to change the  
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the  
Push the tray firmly all  
the way into the  
machine.  
Loading paper in paper tray 1/tray 2 is now  
complete.  
5
2
Changing the paper size in paper tray 1 - tray 2  
To change the paper size of tray 1 - tray 2, follow the steps below.  
This section only explains how to change the paper size. For the procedures for opening/closing the tray and loading  
To have the paper size of tray 1 changed to B5, or to have the paper size of tray 1 changed from B5 to another size,  
consult your dealer or nearest authorised service representative. (Only a service technician can change the paper  
size in this case.)  
Adjust the paper size guide to the paper  
size to be used.  
1 Remove the paper size guide.  
2
Tray 1  
Tray 2  
(A)  
(B)  
LT  
A4  
A4  
LT  
Paper sizes are inscribed at the slot (A) on the  
bottom of the tray and at the hole (B) at the top of  
the paper size guide. ("LT" indicates 8-1/2" x 11"  
size.)  
Align the bottom of the paper size guide with the  
slot, and align the hole at the top with the locking  
tab.  
Hook  
Paper guide  
With the base of the tray pressed all the way down,  
hold down the hook at the bottom on the paper  
size guide and pull the paper size guide up slightly.  
NOTES  
NOTES  
Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press  
down on the tray.  
Before changing the paper size of tray 1, raise the  
paper guide.  
When attaching the paper size guide, make sure  
that the top and bottom of the guide are aligned to  
the same paper size.  
If the top and bottom of the paper size guide are not  
aligned to the same paper size, skewed feeding  
and misfeeds will result.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LOADING PAPER  
Push in the paper guide so that it locks  
into place.  
3
5 Set the paper type and paper size.  
For the procedure for configuring these settings,  
2-14).  
An incorrect paper type or paper size setting may  
cause automatic selection of the wrong type or  
size of paper, and result in a misfeed or otherwise  
prevent printing.  
Push the paper size guide in until the hook at the  
bottom locks into place. (You will hear a "click"  
when the hook locks.) Move the paper size guide  
slightly to verify that it has locked into place.  
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to adjust the far paper  
guide to the paper size to be used.  
4
Be sure to adjust the far paper guide to the same  
size as the near paper guide.  
NOTES  
When removing and attaching the far paper size  
guide, take care not to hit the front cover of the  
machine.  
Adjust both the front and back guides. If only one  
guide is adjusted, skewed feeding and misfeeds  
may result.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOADING PAPER  
Loading paper in paper tray 3  
Approximately 500 sheets of standard paper (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)) from A3 to A5R size (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)  
can be loaded in tray 3. Special papers such as tabbed paper and transparency film can also be loaded. For  
information on what special papers can be used, see "Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that  
can be used in the trays)" on page 2-12. To load tabbed paper or transparency film, see "Loading tabbed paper" or  
"Loading transparency film" on the next page.  
1 Pull out paper tray 3.  
3 Gently push tray 3 into the machine.  
Gently pull the tray out  
until it stops.  
Push the tray firmly all  
the way into the  
machine.  
2
4 Set the paper type.  
2 Load paper into the tray.  
If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an  
inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the  
paper type was changed, be sure to change the  
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the  
The paper stack must not  
be higher than the  
indicator line (no more  
than 500 sheets of  
SHARP standard paper  
(80 g/m2 (20 lbs.)).  
Loading paper in paper tray 3 is now  
complete.  
To change the paper  
size, see "Changing the paper size in paper tray 3"  
below.  
5
Changing the paper size in paper tray 3  
1 Pull out paper tray 3.  
4 Gently push tray 3 into the machine.  
Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine.  
If paper remains in the tray, remove it.  
Set the paper type of the paper that was  
loaded in tray 3.  
Adjust the guide plates A and B by  
5
6
2
squeezing their lock levers and sliding  
them to the paper size to be loaded.  
The guide plates A and  
Be sure to change the appropriate settings as  
(see page 2-14).  
If you changed the paper size, be sure to change  
the paper size setting. An incorrect paper size  
setting will cause the wrong paper to be  
automatically selected and may prevent printing or  
cause misfeeds.  
B are slidable. Adjust  
them to the paper size to  
be  
loaded  
while  
squeezing their lock  
levers.  
3 Load paper into the tray.  
Changing the paper size in paper tray 3 is  
now complete.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LOADING PAPER  
Loading tabbed paper  
When using tabbed paper, follow the steps below to attach the special guide to the divider plate at the bottom  
edge of the tabbed paper. (Tabbed paper cannot be used in tray 4.)  
1 Take out the tabbed paper guide.  
3 Place the tabbed paper in the tray.  
Place the tabbed paper  
The guide is stored  
inside the left side of the  
machine as shown.  
with the print side face  
up.  
Be sure to replace the  
guide when you have  
finished using it.  
2 Pull out the tray and attach the guide.  
[Example]  
Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond  
with the originals as shown below.  
Slide the divider plate to  
the position of the  
bottom edge of the  
tabbed paper and attach  
the guide so that it  
covers the divider plate.  
Original  
Tabbed paper  
Front side  
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
4th page  
Gently push the tray in and set the paper  
type to tabbed paper.  
4
Loading transparency film  
Be sure to load transparency film with the label facing down and the film oriented vertically. Smudging and a  
dirty image may result if the film is loaded with the label facing up. (Transparency film cannot be used in tray 4.)  
Changing the paper size in paper tray 4  
Plain paper from A3 to B5 size (11" x 17" to 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R) can be loaded in tray 4. For paper that can be used,  
The procedures for loading paper in tray 4 and changing the paper size are the same as for tray 3 (see page 2-5).  
NOTE  
When referring to the explanations of tray 3, keep in mind that special papers such as tabbed paper and  
transparency film cannot be used in tray 4. Use tray 3 for special paper.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
LOADING PAPER  
Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray  
AR-LC6)  
The large capacity tray can hold up to 3,500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11") SHARP standard paper (80 g/m2  
(20 lbs.)). If you wish to change the paper size, please consult your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a  
service technician).  
Push the tray firmly all the way into the  
machine.  
1 Pull the tray out until it stops.  
3
When the tray is in  
The paper table will  
automatically rise to the  
paper feed position.  
operation, do not use  
excessive force to pull  
the tray out. This may  
damage the tray.  
2
Place the paper in the centre of the paper  
table.  
2
The paper stack must  
not be higher than the  
indicator line (up to  
3,500 sheets of SHARP  
standard paper (80 g/m2  
(20 lbs.))  
If the paper type was  
changed, be sure to change the appropriate  
settings as explained in "Setting the paper type  
and paper size" (See page 2-14).  
Specifications  
Name  
Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)  
Paper size  
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")  
Paper weight  
Paper capacity (plain)  
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs.)  
3500 sheets (80 g/m2 (20 lbs.))  
376 mm (W) x 546 mm (D) x 518 mm (H)  
(14-23/32" (W) x 21-1/2" (D) x 20-13/32" (H))  
Dimensions  
Power supply  
Weight  
Supplied from the main unit  
Approximately 28.5 kg (62.9 lbs.)  
Overall dimensions when  
attached to machine  
1347 mm (W) x 679 mm (D)  
(53-3/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D))  
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
LOADING PAPER  
Loading paper in paper tray 5 (optional large capacity tray  
AR-LC7)  
An optional large capacity tray (AR-LC7) is available for the machine. The AR-LC7 can hold up to 3000 sheets of  
80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper. (See the following "Specifications" for the types of paper that can be used in the large  
capacity tray.)  
When installed, the AR-LC7 operates as "Tray 5". The AR-LC7 cannot be used together with the AR-LC6 described  
Part names  
Operation button /  
Indicator  
To load paper in the tray,  
press this button, wait until  
the indicator turns off, and  
then pull the tray out.  
Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.  
Top cover  
Open this cover to  
remove a misfeed.  
However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or  
"LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print side  
face down*.  
* If the two-sided function is disabled using  
"DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator  
settings (page 11 of the administrator settings  
guide), load the paper face up.  
Specifications  
Name  
Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)  
Paper sizes*  
A3 (11" x 17"), B4 (8-1/2" x 14"),  
A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)  
Paper weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to  
28 lbs.)  
Paper size display  
One tray 3000 sheets (80 g/m2 or  
20 lbs.)  
NOTES  
Number  
paper  
/Paper capacity  
Power supply  
Dimensions  
of  
trays  
If you wish to change the paper size, please consult  
your dealer (the paper size must be changed by a  
service technician).  
Do not use curled or folded paper. This may cause  
misfeeds.  
When the tray has been pulled out, do not place  
heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray.  
Do not place any objects on the large capacity tray  
or use it instead of a chair or step. This may  
damage the tray and interfere with the use of the  
bypass tray.  
Supplied from the machine  
690mm (W) x 587mm (D) x 521.5mm  
(H) (27-5/32" (W) x 23-7/64" (D) x  
20-17/32" (H))  
Weight  
Approx. 50 kg (Approx. 110 lbs.)  
* The indicated sizes of plain paper can be used.  
When using the AR-LC7, refer also to "More  
information on plain paper" on page 2-13.  
Specifications are subject to change for improvement  
without notice.  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LOADING PAPER  
Loading paper in the AR-LC7  
If the paper runs out during printing, a message will appear in the display. Follow the procedure below to load  
paper.  
1 Pull the tray out until it stops.  
CAUTION  
When loading paper, take care not to insert your  
hands into holes on paper table.  
Pull the finger grip up  
and pull the tray out  
until it stops.  
Do not insert your  
hands here.  
2
NOTE  
To add or change paper, press the operation button.  
When the button is  
pressed, the indicator  
will blink until the paper  
NOTES  
Do not insert objects in  
the tray or attempt to  
place spare paper in  
the tray. This may  
damage the tray.  
table stops descending.  
Do not pull the tray out  
until the indicator turns  
off. Attempting to pull  
the tray out when the indicator is blinking or solidly lit  
may damage the tray.  
Use SHARP-recommended paper (page 2-22).  
Special paper cannot be used.  
2 Place the paper on the paper table.  
The paper stack must  
not be higher than the  
indicator line.  
Push the tray firmly all the way into the  
machine.  
3
When the paper tray is  
pulled out, the paper  
After the tray is pushed  
in, the indicator will  
blink until the paper  
Indicator  
line  
table  
descended  
position  
will  
have  
a
to  
where  
table  
finishes  
approximately 500 sheets of A4 size (8-1/2" x 11")  
80 g/m2 (20 lbs.) paper can be placed. After the  
paper is placed, the paper table will descend to a  
position where an additional approximately 500  
sheets can be placed. When the paper table has  
descended all the way, approximately 3000 sheets  
can be held.  
ascending and then  
light solidly.  
If a different type of paper is loaded that was used  
previously, the paper settings for tray 5 must be  
changed on the machine. Be sure to change to the  
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the  
paper type and paper size" on page 2-14.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOADING PAPER  
Loading paper in the bypass tray  
The bypass tray can be used to print on plain paper, postcards, label sheets, tabbed paper, and other special papers.  
When using SHARP standard paper, up to 100 sheets can be loaded (up to 20 postcards) for continuous printing  
similar to the other trays. For the paper types that can be used in the bypass tray, see "Specifications of paper trays  
NOTE  
After loading the paper in the bypass tray, be sure to set the paper type and size (step 4) if these were changed.  
Set the type and size of the paper loaded in  
the bypass tray.  
1 Open the bypass tray.  
4
If the paper size was changed from an AB size to an  
inch size, or from an inch size to an AB size, or if the  
paper type was changed, be sure to change the  
appropriate settings as explained in "Setting the  
This completes the procedure for loading  
paper in the bypass tray.  
5
When loading A3, B4,  
A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x  
14", 8-1/2" x 13" or  
8-1/2" x 11"R size paper,  
be sure to pull the  
auxiliary tray all the way  
out. If the auxiliary tray is  
Loading tabbed paper in the bypass  
tray  
[Example]  
Make sure that the positions of the tabs correspond  
with the originals as shown below.  
not pulled all the way out, the size of the loaded  
paper will not be correctly displayed.  
Original  
Tabbed paper  
Set the bypass tray guides to the width of  
the copy paper.  
2
3
Front side  
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
4th page  
Place the tabbed paper face up.  
Insert the copy paper all the way into the  
bypass tray. (Do not force the paper in.)  
Place the copy paper  
Front  
face up. If the bypass  
tray guides are set wider  
than the copy paper, the  
inside of the machine  
may become soiled,  
resulting in smudges on  
succeeding copies. A gap may cause skewing  
or wrinkling.  
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LOADING PAPER  
Important points when using the  
bypass tray  
Be sure to load A5 paper, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper,  
and postcards as shown (1) horizontal loading in  
the diagram below.  
(1)  
(2)  
2
(1):Horizontal loading  
(2):Vertical loading  
When loading plain paper other than SHARP  
standard paper, special media other than  
postcards, SHARP-recommended transparency  
film, or paper to be printed on the back, the  
paper must be loaded one sheet at a time.  
Loading more than one sheet at a time will cause  
misfeeds.  
Before loading heavy paper, straighten any  
curling in the paper.  
When adding paper, remove any paper  
remaining in the tray, combine it with the paper to  
be added, and reload as a single stack.  
Do not use paper that has already been printed  
on by a plain paper fax machine or a laser  
printer. This may cause printed images to  
become dirty.  
When printing on transparency film, be sure to  
remove each sheet as it exits the machine.  
Allowing sheets to stack in the output tray may  
cause curling.  
Use only Sharp-recommended transparency  
film. Transparency film should be loaded in the  
bypass tray with the label facing down and the  
film oriented vertically. Smudging and a dirty  
image may result if the film is placed with the  
label facing up.  
Label facing down  
When loading multiple sheets of transparency  
film in the bypass tray, be sure to fan the sheets  
several times before loading.  
Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper.  
Tabbed sheets made of film or other material  
cannot be used.  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LOADING PAPER  
Specifications of paper trays (Types and sizes of paper that  
can be used in the trays)  
The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below.  
Tray No.  
(tray name)  
Tray 1  
Applicable paper types  
Applicable paper sizes  
Paper weight  
Plain paper (Refer to the next page  
60 to 105 g/m2  
(16 to 28 lbs.)  
A4, 8-1/2" x 11"  
Tray 2  
A4, 8-1/2" x 11"  
• When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting  
2-14), the following paper sizes can be  
automatically detected:  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8-1/2" x 13"  
(Refer to the next page "More • When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting the  
Plain paper  
60 to 128 g/m2  
(16 to 34 lbs.)  
following paper sizes can be automatically detected:  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"  
x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R  
• Non-standard sizes  
• When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting  
2-14), the following paper sizes can be  
automatically detected:  
A4, A4R, B5, B5R (only A4 for tabbed paper)  
following paper sizes can be automatically detected:  
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R (only 8-1/2" x 11" for  
tabbed paper)  
Tray 3  
Special paper  
(Refer to the  
• Heavy paper  
Transparency  
See the remarks  
for special papers  
on the following  
page.  
information on film  
that can be  
used".)  
• Labels  
Tabbed paper  
• Non-standard sizes smaller than A4 or  
8-1/2" x 11"  
• 40 sheets of transparency film can be loaded  
Tabbed paper can be used  
• When "AUTO-AB" is selected in "Setting  
2-14), the following paper sizes can be  
automatically detected:  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8-1/2" x 13"  
• When "AUTO-INCH" is selected in "Setting  
2-14), the following paper sizes can be  
automatically detected:  
Plain paper (Refer to the next  
60 to 128 g/m2  
(16 to 34 lbs.)  
Tray 4  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x  
11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R  
• Non-standard sizes  
Same as tray 3. Postcards can also be used.  
However,  
• Up to 100 sheets of plain paper can be loaded.  
• Up to 20 sheets of transparency film can be loaded.  
• Up to 20 postcards can be loaded.  
The same paper as  
tray 3, and also 52  
Bypass tray  
to 59 g  
/m2 (14 lbs.  
to 15 lbs.) thin  
paper can be used.  
Tray 5  
(AR-LC6)  
Same as tray 2.  
Tray 5  
Plain paper (Refer to the next page A3, B4, A4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 60 to 105 g/m2  
(AR-LC7)  
"More information on plain paper".) 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R  
(16 to 28 lbs.)  
2-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LOADING PAPER  
More information on plain paper  
Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed  
off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures.  
Paper in AB system  
A5 to A3  
Paper in inch system  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 11" x 17"  
SHARP standard paper  
(See page 2-22)  
64 g/m2 (17 lbs.)  
Plain  
paper  
Restrictions on paper  
other  
than  
SHARP  
60 to 105 g/m2 or 16 to 28 lbs.  
standard paper  
Recycled, coloured, pre-punched, pre-printed and letterhead papers must conform to the same conditions  
as above.  
2
More information on special media that can be used  
Incorrect feeding may result in poor toner fusing (the toner does not adhere to the paper well and can be rubbed  
off), skewed feeding, misfeeds, or other failures.  
Type  
Remarks  
• For A5 to A4 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" to 8-1/2" x 11" sizes, heavy paper ranging  
from 106 to 128 g/m2 or 16 to 34 lbs. can be used.  
• Other heavy papers  
Heavy paper  
176 g/m2 (65 lbs.) can be used.  
200 to 205 g/m2 (110 lbs.) can be used but only for A4, 8-1/2" x 11" paper  
in the portrait orientation.  
Special  
paper  
• For A5 or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" paper, the orientation must be landscape.  
• Use SHARP recommended paper.  
• Use only tabbed sheets that are made of paper. (Tabbed sheets made of  
film or other material cannot be used.)  
Transparency film,  
Tabbed paper  
Postcards  
• Japanese official postcards can be used.  
Paper that can be used for automatic two-sided printing  
Paper used for automatic two-sided printing (paper that can be fed through the duplex module) must meet the  
following conditions:  
Paper type :Plain paper as specified on page above.  
Paper size :Must be one of the following standard sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R or A5R (11" x 17",  
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)  
Paper weight :64 to 128 g/m2 (16 to 34 lbs.)(special heavy papers indicated in the table above)  
NOTES  
Special papers (explained above) cannot be used for automatic two-sided printing. However, certain special  
heavy papers (index paper, cover paper) can be used.  
Various types of plain paper and special paper are sold. Some of these cannot be used in the machine. Please  
consult your retailer or your dealer when buying paper.  
The image quality and toner fusibility of special papers may change due to ambient conditions, operating  
conditions, and paper characteristics, resulting in image quality inferior to that of SHARP standard paper.  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
LOADING PAPER  
Setting the paper type and paper size  
Follow these steps to change the paper type setting when the paper type has been changed in a paper tray. For the  
paper types that can be used in each tray, see page 2-12.  
1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
5 Touch the [TYPE / SIZE] key.  
The system setting  
PER TRAY SETTINGS  
TYPE / SIZE  
PY  
SYSTEM  
menu  
screen  
will  
JOB STATUS SETTINGS  
TRAY 3  
PLAIN / A4  
appear.  
DOC.  
FILING  
COPY  
FAX  
PRINT  
Select the type of paper that was loaded in  
the tray.  
Example: The paper type of tray 3 is selected  
2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.  
6
The paper tray selection  
screen will appear.  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
RINT  
CANCEL  
TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING  
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE.  
1/2  
ATA  
ORWARD  
PRINTER  
CONDITION  
TAB PAPER  
LETTER HEAD  
HEAVY PAPER  
LABELS  
PLAIN  
PRE-PRINTED  
RECYCLED  
PRE-PUNCHED  
COLOUR  
TRANSPARENCY  
1/2  
Touch the desired paper type to select it. The  
paper size setting screen will appear.  
3 Touch the [TRAY SETTINGS] key.  
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS  
NOTES  
Tabbed paper can only be used in tray 3, bypass  
tray and the inserter.  
TRAY SETTINGS  
Heavy paper, label sheets, and transparency film  
cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4, and 5.  
Select the size of paper that was loaded in  
the tray.  
Touch the appropriate keys (checkboxes).  
7
Display the setting screen of the desired  
paper tray.  
4
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
TYPE  
OK  
TRAY3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING  
OK  
FIXED PAPER SIDE  
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS  
TYPE / SIZE  
PLAIN / A4  
SIZE  
TYPE  
1/8  
1
/
1
/
11X17,82X14,82X11  
TRAY 1  
PLAIN  
AUTO-INCH  
AUTO-AB  
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
8
2X11R,74X102,52X8  
2
R
DISABLE DUPLEX  
DISABLE STAPLE  
DISABLE PUNCH  
A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5  
B5R,216X330(82X13)  
1
DOC.  
FILING  
/
I-FAX  
COPY  
PRINT  
FAX  
NON STANDARD  
SIZE  
SIZE INPUT  
X420 Y297  
2/2  
[AUTO-INCH] key : Select when you have  
loaded an inch-based size  
of paper.  
Touch the  
setting screen of the desired paper tray.  
key or  
key to display the  
NOTE  
[AUTO-AB] key  
: Select when you have  
loaded an AB size of paper.  
To automatically switch to a tray with the same size  
and type of paper (if there is one) in the event that the  
paper tray runs out of paper, display the last screen  
with the  
SWITCHING].  
[SIZE INPUT] key : Select to directly enter a  
paper size (see page 2-17).  
key and select [AUTO TRAY  
[NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox :  
Select when you have  
loaded a non-standard size  
of paper (see page 2-17).  
2-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
LOADING PAPER  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
NOTE  
CANCEL  
2/2  
TRAY 3 TYPE/SIZE SETTING  
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE  
Sizes that can be selected vary depending on the  
selected paper type.  
USER TYPE 1  
USER TYPE 5  
USER TYPE 2  
USER TYPE 6  
USER TYPE 3  
USER TYPE 7  
USER TYPE 4  
Touch the [OK] key in the size setting  
screen.  
8
1/2  
You will return to the tray setting screen of step 4.  
Configure paper settings for each tray and  
then touch the [OK] key to exit.  
10  
Select output functions that can be used  
with the selected tray.  
9
NOTE  
Touch the checkboxes  
under the desired items  
to select them.  
DOC.  
FILING  
The size and type of paper loaded in the bypass tray  
can also be set from the paper setting screen. Touch  
the [PAPER SELECT] key in the main screen to  
display the paper selection screen, and then touch  
the [PAPER SELECT] key of the bypass tray and go  
to step 5.  
2
I-FAX  
FAX  
PRINT  
COPY  
NOTE  
When the inserter (option) is selected, printing of  
faxes and Internet faxes is not possible.  
User type  
Select a "User type" when the name of the paper  
type does not appear in the selections or when you  
wish to select the tray attributes yourself.  
Touch the  
key in step 5 on the previous page  
to display the user type selection screen and then  
select a user type.  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
LOADING PAPER  
Programming and editing paper types  
To program or edit the name of a paper type or set paper attributes, follow the steps below.  
Touch the [PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION]  
key.  
1
4 Set the paper attributes.  
Touch the checkboxes to the left of the items to  
select them.  
OK  
CANCEL  
EXIT  
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION  
No.01  
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION  
TYPE NAME  
USER TYPE 1  
DISABLE DUPLEX  
DISABLE PUNCH  
FIXED PAPER SIDE  
ISABLE STAPLE  
Select the paper type that you wish to  
program or edit.  
2
FIXED PAPER SIDE:  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Select this checkbox when paper is to be loaded  
print side down in the tray. Make sure a checkmark  
does not appear when paper is to be loaded print  
side up.  
• If the two-sided function is disabled using  
"DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the administrator  
settings (page 11 of the administrator settings  
guide), load the paper face up.  
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION  
SELECT THE PAPER TYPE TO EDIT.  
USER TYPE 1  
USER TYPE 2  
USER  
USER  
R TYPE 5  
USER TYPE 6  
DISABLE DUPLEX:  
Prohibits two-sided printing. Enable when the  
backside of the paper cannot be printed on.  
3 Touch the [TYPE NAME] key.  
A character entry screen appears. Enter up to 14  
characters. Refer to page 7-29 for the procedure  
for entering characters.  
DISABLE STAPLE:  
Prohibits stapling. Enable when using special  
papers such as transparency film and label  
sheets.  
CANCEL  
EXIT  
PAPER TYPE REGISTRATION  
No.01  
DISABLE PUNCH:  
Prohibits punching. Enable when using special  
papers such as transparency film and label  
sheets.  
TYPE NAME  
USER TYPE 1  
DISABLE DUPLEX  
DISABLE PUNCH  
D PAPER SIDE  
DISABLE STAPLE  
NOTES  
Tray attributes depend on the selected paper.  
"FIXED PAPER SIDE" and "DISABLE DUPLEX"  
cannot be simultaneously enabled.  
Touch the [EXIT] key to exit the  
programming/editing procedure.  
5
2-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LOADING PAPER  
Setting the paper size when a special size is loaded  
NOTE  
Special sizes of paper cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 4 and 5.  
Trays 3 and the bypass tray  
Inserter (option)  
Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the  
Perform steps 1 through 5 of "Setting the  
1
1
Touch the [SIZE INPUT] key and then  
2
2 Touch the [SIZE SELECT] key.  
touch the [AB] tab.  
OK  
2
The  
size  
selection  
The size entry palette  
Y
1
1
2
/
/
2
11X  
17,8  
X
14,8  
X
AUTO-INCH  
1
1
1
/
/
/
2
4
X10 ,5  
2
screen appears.  
8
X
11R,7  
appears.  
(148 432)  
mm  
X
Y
420  
297  
A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B  
B5R  
AUTO-AB  
(100 297)  
mm  
SIZE SELECT  
INCH  
AB  
3 Select the desired paper size.  
Touch the  
key or the  
key to enter  
3
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions of  
the paper.  
INSERTER TYPE/SIZE SETTING  
OK  
TYPE  
TYPE  
SIZE  
1/2  
X
X
(width) is initially  
1
1
/
PLAIN  
/
11X17  
8
2X14  
8
2X11  
OK  
Y
selected. To enter Y  
(length), touch the [Y]  
key and then enter the  
length.  
1
1
/
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
82X11R  
5
2X82R  
74X102  
(148 432)  
mm  
300  
100  
X
Y
(100 29
mm  
There are separate screens for inch-based paper  
selection and AB paper selection. Touch the  
INCH  
AB  
key or the  
key to switch between the screens.  
4 Touch the [OK] key.  
4 Touch the [OK] key.  
X
You will return to the size  
setting screen of step 2.  
You will return to the size  
setting screen of step 2.  
OK  
Y
TYPE  
OK  
(148 432)  
mm  
300  
100  
X
Y
SIZE  
2  
(100 297)  
mm  
1
/
1
/
8
2X14  
8
2X11  
INCH  
AB  
1
1
1
1
/
2
/
/
/
5
2X82R  
4X10  
Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the  
paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15).  
If the paper is a non-standard size, select  
the [NON STANDARD SIZE] checkbox.  
5
5
1
1
/
2
X11  
/
11  
X
X
17,8  
2
X
14,8  
1
1
1
1
1
/
/
/
/
/
8
2
11R,7  
4
X
102,5  
2
X
8
2
R
A3,A4,A4R,A5R,B4,B5  
1
/
B5R,216x330(82x13)  
NON STANDARD  
SIZE  
X300 Y100  
Perform steps 8 through 10 of "Setting the  
paper type and paper size" (pages 2-15).  
6
2-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
The system settings can be used as needed to meet the needs of your workplace. The items that can be set with the  
system settings are shown below.  
Total count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .The number of pages processed by the machine and optional equipment  
can be displayed. (See page 2-20)  
Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure the screen contrast, date and time, and keyboard  
1
selection* settings. (See page 2-20)  
List print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Used to print lists of settings and fonts. (See page 2-20)  
Paper tray settings . . . . . . . . . . . .The paper type, paper size and automatic tray switching can be set for each  
tray. Automatic tray switching allows feeding to switch between trays loaded  
with the same type and size of paper. If one tray runs out of paper during  
printing, printing will continue from the other tray. (See page 2-20)  
For the detailed descriptions and use of the settings listed below, see the fax, image send, and printer  
manuals.  
1
Address control* . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to store information for various functions.  
2
Sender control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to store the sender's information that appears on your Scan to E-mail  
transmissions at the destination.  
Fax data receive/forward* . . . . . .Faxes received to memory and received Internet faxes can be forwarded to  
1
another destination.  
Printer condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Used to configure default settings for the printer function (see the Operation  
manual (for printer)).  
2
Document filing control* . . . . . . . . . Used to configure default settings for the document filing function. (pages 7-25  
Administrator settings . . . . . . . . .These are items that are used by the administrator of the machine to  
configure machine settings. A key appears for these settings in the system  
settings menu screen. For information on these settings, see the  
administrator settings guide.  
*
1 These settings can be configured in a system where the facsimile, network scanner and Internet fax function is  
available.  
*
2 These settings can be configured in a system where the network scanner function is available.  
General procedure for system settings  
Touch the [CLOCK] key and then the following  
screen appears.  
1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
The system setting  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PY  
CLOCK ADJUST  
OK  
menu  
screen  
will  
SYSTEM  
JOB STATUS SETTINGS  
appear.  
YEAR  
2010  
MONTH  
04  
DAY  
04  
HOUR  
11  
MINUTE  
30  
DATE FORMAT  
DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING  
Touch the key of the desired item to  
display its setting screen.  
The example of selecting the [DEFAULT SETTINGS]  
key and then the [CLOCK] key is explained below.  
Touch the year, month, day, hour or minute  
2
4
key, and then use the  
or  
key to  
adjust the setting.  
If you select a non-existent date (for example,  
Feb. 30), the [OK] key will grey out to prevent  
entry of the date.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
EXIT  
DEFAULT  
SETTINGS  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
LIST PRINT  
TOTAL COUNT  
PRINTER  
CONDITION  
Select [DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME SETTING]  
checkbox to have the time automatically  
change at the beginning and end of daylight  
saving time.  
FAX DATA  
RECEIVE/FORWARD  
SENDER CONTROL  
ADDRESS CONTROL  
DOCUMENT FILING  
CONTROL  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
The system settings are described in detail on the  
following pages.  
3 Touch the [CLOCK] key.  
2-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
5 Touch the [DATE FORMAT] key.  
More information on setting procedures  
In the following type of screen, a setting is selected  
by touching the key so that a checkmark (  
appears. The settings below are configured to  
allow use of tray 1 in print, copy, and fax modes. To  
The following screen appears.  
)
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
DATE FORMAT  
OK  
2010/04/04/SUN 11:30  
DAY-NAME  
display the next screen, touch the  
or  
keys.  
YYYY/MM/DD  
POSITION  
FIRST  
12-HOUR  
24-HOUR  
MM/DD/YYYY  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS  
TYPE / SIZE  
DD/MM/YYYY  
LAST  
OK  
FIXED PAPER SIDE  
DISABLE DUPLEX  
DISABLE STAPLE  
DISABLE PUNCH  
1/8  
TRAY1  
PLAIN / A4  
If you wish to change the format of the date  
and time, touch the desired format keys.  
DOC.  
FILING  
I-FAX  
PRINT  
COPY  
FAX  
6
2
Touched keys are highlighted.  
The selected format is applied to lists printed out in  
"LIST PRINT".  
7 Touch the [OK] key.  
You will return to the  
date and time setting  
screen.  
OK  
AME  
ON  
T
12-HOUR  
8 Touch the [OK] key.  
9 To exit the settings, touch the [EXIT] key.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
EXIT  
DEFAULT  
SETTINGS  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
LIST PRINT  
TOTAL COUNT  
FAX DATA  
RECEIVE/FORWARD  
PRINTER  
CONDITION  
ADDRESS CONTROL  
SENDER CONTROL  
DOCUMENT FILING  
CONTROL  
ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS  
2-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
About the settings  
Total count  
List print  
This displays the following sheet counts (the  
counts that can be displayed vary depending on  
the options installed):  
This is used to print lists of machine settings and a  
test page to check resident fonts.  
The following lists and pages are available:  
1
Number of pages output by the machine.  
All custom setting list  
2
Number of original pages transmitted by the  
machine.  
Number of times the automatic document feeder  
Shows the hardware status, software status,  
printer configuration settings, tray settings, and  
counts.  
3
Printer test page  
was used to feed original pages and number of  
times the stapler was used (if installed).  
Number of pages stored by document filing.  
Shows the PCL symbol set list, fonts, network  
interface (NIC interface) settings, and settings  
used for the NIC card.  
4
1
In the case of  
only,  
Sending address list  
One touch destination list, group list, program  
list, and memory box list.  
A3 (11" x 17") size paper is counted as two  
sheets.  
Each sheet of paper used for automatic two-  
sided copying is counted as two sheets (A3  
(11" x 17") paper is counted as four sheets).  
Paper with an entered size of 384 mm (15-1/8")  
or larger is counted as two sheets (four sheets  
during automatic two-sided copying).  
Document filing user / folder list  
Shows the user names and folder names for  
document filing.  
Sender control list  
Shows the senders that have been stored.  
Default settings  
NOTE  
The following settings can be configured:  
A test page cannot be printed if "PROHIBIT TEST  
PAGE PRINTING" (See the "Operation manual (for  
printer)".) has been set to "prohibited" in the  
administrator settings.  
Display contrast  
Screen contrast adjustment is used to make the  
LCD touch panel easier to view under various  
lighting conditions. Touch the [LIGHTER] key to  
make the screen lighter, or the [DARKER] key to  
make the screen darker.  
Paper tray settings  
The paper type, paper size, enabled modes and  
automatic tray switching can be set for each tray.  
See page 2-14 for details on setting the paper type  
and paper size. Automatic switching to another  
paper tray is used to automatically switch to  
another tray with the same size and type of paper in  
the event that the paper runs out during continuous  
printing. This requires that the trays be loaded with  
the same size of paper. The paper tray settings can  
be enabled or disabled for each tray, and for printer  
mode, copy mode, fax mode, Internet fax mode,  
and document filing mode. To enable any function,  
Clock  
Use this to set the date and time in the  
machine's built-in clock. This clock is used by  
functions that require date and time information.  
Keyboard select  
The layout of the keyboard that appears in letter  
entry screens can be changed.  
Select the arrangement of the letter keys that  
you find easiest to use.  
The  
following  
three  
alphabet  
keyboard  
configurations are available:  
touch the check box key so that a checkmark  
appears.  
(
)
Keyboard 1 (QWERT... configuration)*  
Keyboard 2 (AZERTY...configuration)  
Keyboard 3 (ABCDEF...configuration)  
* The default setting is "Keyboard 1".  
(Example: Character entry screen when  
Keyboard 3 is selected)  
ABC abc  
2-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES  
When toner runs low, a message will appear to inform you that the toner cartridge must be replaced.  
NOTE  
To view the approximate amount of toner remaining, hold down the [COPY] key during printing or when the  
machine is on standby. The percentage of toner remaining will appear in the display while you hold down the key.  
When the percentage falls to "20-0%" , obtain a new toner cartridge and keep it ready for replacement.  
Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge.  
1 Open the front cover.  
Shake  
the  
toner  
cartridge horizontally.  
Do not rotate it as shown  
at left.  
2
4 Insert the new toner cartridge.  
Align the toner cartridge  
with the insert hole and  
push it in as shown.  
Do not rotate the  
cartridge.  
2 Remove the toner cartridge gently.  
Push the cartridge in until it locks securely  
in place.  
5
Hold the toner cartridge  
with both hands as  
shown in the illustration,  
and pull it out of the  
machine.  
Remove the new toner cartridge from the  
box and shake it five or six times  
horizontally.  
6 Close the front cover.  
3
NOTE  
Shake  
cartridge  
the  
well  
toner  
to  
ensure that the toner  
flows well and will not  
stick to the inside of  
the cartridge.  
CAUTION  
Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire. Toner may fly and cause burns.  
Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.  
NOTE  
Place the used toner cartridge in the plastic bag and store it. When placing the toner cartridge in the bag, insert  
it horizontally, not vertically. If the cartridge is stood on end, the collected used toner may spill out and soil the floor  
or your clothes.  
2-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
STORAGE OF SUPPLIES  
Standard supplies for this product that can replaced by the user include paper, toner cartridges, and staple cartridges  
for the finisher.  
For best copying results, be sure to use only Sharp Genuine Supplies which are designed,  
engineered, and tested to maximize the life and performance of Sharp products. Look for  
the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package.  
GENUINE SUPPLIES  
Proper storage  
1. Store the supplies in a location that is:  
clean and dry,  
at a stable temperature,  
not exposed to direct sunlight.  
2. Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat.  
3. Paper stored in packages standing up or out of  
the wrapper may curl or become damp, resulting  
in paper misfeeds.  
4. Store a new toner cartridge box horizontally. Do  
not store it standing on end. If stored standing on  
end, the toner may not distribute well even after  
shaking the cartridge vigorously, and will remain  
inside the cartridge without flowing out.  
Supply and Consumables  
The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination  
of production. Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary  
use of the product - whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered  
as spare parts. Consumables too, are available for 7 years following the termination of production.  
2-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MISFEED REMOVAL  
When a misfeed has occurred during printing, the message "A MISFEED HAS OCCURRED". will appear in the touch  
panel display of the operation panel and printing including copying and facsimile output will stop. The approximate  
misfeed locations are indicated with " " shown in the illustration below. The page numbers for detailed information  
on misfeed removal are also shown.  
1
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing  
area, and exit area (See page 2-24)  
2
Misfeed in the automatic document  
feeder (See page 2-31)  
3
When feeding paper from tray 2, the  
bypass tray, or tray 5, this mark may  
blink. When the mark blinks, check the  
following diagrams:  
2
Fourth diagram in step 3 on page 2-26  
Diagram in step 6 on page 2-27  
Diagram in step 8 on page 2-29, 2-30  
4
Misfeed in the bypass tray (See page 2-28)  
5
Misfeed in the finisher (See page 3-11)  
6
Misfeed in the saddle stitch finisher  
(See page 3-11)  
7
Misfeed in the inserter (See page 3-17)  
8
Misfeed in the tray 3 (See page 2-27)  
9
Misfeed in the tray 4 (See page 2-27)  
10  
Misfeed in tray 1 - tray 2  
(See page 2-26)  
11  
Misfeed in the tray 5 (See page 2-29, 2-30)  
NOTE  
Printing is not possible when a misfeed occurs, and thus any faxes or Internet faxes received at this time will be  
temporarily held in memory. The faxes will print out automatically as soon as the misfeed is cleared.  
NOTES  
CAUTION  
The fusing unit is hot. Take  
care in removing paper.  
Do not damage or touch the photoconductive  
drum. (See page 2-24.)  
Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during  
removal.  
lf paper is accidentally torn during removal, be  
sure to remove all pieces.  
Fusing unit  
Misfeed removal guidance  
Misfeed removal guidance can be displayed by touching the [INFORMATION] key on the touch panel after a misfeed  
has occurred.  
INFORMATION  
2-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in the transport area, fusing area, and exit area  
Misfed in the fusing area  
o
CAUTION  
Turn roller rotating knob  
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.  
(Do not touch the metal parts.)  
B in the direction of the  
arrow to remove the  
misfed paper.  
1 Remove the duplex unit.  
Roller rotating knob B  
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
CAUTION  
The fusing unit is hot. Take care in removing paper.  
(Do not touch any metal parts.)  
If the misfed paper is  
inside the fusing area,  
turn down the fusing unit  
open tab to open the  
fusing unit and remove  
Remove the misfed paper as shown in the  
illustrations below.  
Misfed in the transport area  
Turn roller rotating knob  
A in the direction of the  
arrow to remove the  
misfed paper.  
2
the misfed paper.  
Fusing unit open tab  
Roller rotating knob A  
NOTES  
Do not touch or  
damage the transfer  
roller.  
Misfed in the exit area  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Transfer roller  
Do not touch or  
damage  
the  
photoconductive  
drum.  
After clearing the  
misfeed, promptly  
3 Gently close the duplex unit.  
After closing, confirm  
Photoconductive drum  
that  
the  
misfeed  
close the duplex unit.  
Leaving the unit  
message has been  
cleared and the normal  
display appears.  
open may adversely affect the photo-sensitive drum  
and cause poor copy quality.  
2-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in the duplex unit  
1 Remove the duplex unit.  
4 Close the cover of the duplex unit.  
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
2 Open the cover of the duplex unit.  
5 Gently close the duplex unit.  
After closing the duplex  
2
unit, confirm that the  
misfeed message has  
been cleared and the  
normal display appears.  
3 Remove the misfed paper.  
Misfeed in upper part of unit  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Misfeed in lower part of unit  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
2-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in the paper feed area  
NOTE  
Be sure to follow the misfeed removal sequence. Do not pull the tray out immediately as the misfeed may have  
occurred with paper partially fed out of the tray. Open the left cover and see if there is misfed paper first (steps 1  
and 2). If you open the tray without checking, the partially fed paper may tear and leave torn pieces in the machine,  
increasing the difficulty of removal.  
Misfeed in paper tray 1 - tray 2  
If paper is misfed in tray 2 (right-side tray)...  
1 Remove the duplex unit.  
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
When using tray 2,  
2 Remove the misfed paper.  
check the paper transfer  
unit inside the tray and  
remove any misfed  
paper.  
Turn roller rotating knob  
A in the direction of the  
arrow to remove the  
misfed paper.  
4 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.  
Roller rotating knob A  
Push the tray all the way  
back in.  
NOTE  
A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so  
please check the entire compartment carefully.  
If misfed paper is not found in step 2, pull  
out paper tray 1 - tray 2 and remove the  
misfed paper.  
3
5 Gently close the duplex unit.  
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
Pull the tray all the way  
out until it stops.  
After closing, confirm  
that the misfeed  
message has been  
cleared and the normal  
display appears.  
If paper is misfed in tray 1 (left-side tray)...  
Lift the paper guide and  
remove  
paper.  
the  
misfed  
Be sure to replace the  
paper guide in its  
original position after  
removing the paper.  
2-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in paper tray 3  
Close the lower cover on the left side of  
the machine.  
1 Remove the duplex unit.  
5
6
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
2 Remove the misfed paper.  
2
If misfed paper is not found in step 3, pull out  
paper tray 3 and remove the misfed paper.  
Pull the tray all the way  
Turn roller rotating knob  
A in the direction of the  
arrow to remove the  
misfed paper.  
out until it stops.  
Check the  
paper  
transfer unit inside the  
tray.  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Roller rotating knob A  
Open the lower cover on the left side of the  
machine.  
7 Gently close paper tray 3.  
3
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
Push the tray all the way  
back in.  
4 Remove the misfed paper.  
8 Gently close the duplex unit.  
Be careful not to tear the  
After closing, confirm  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
that  
the  
misfeed  
message has been  
cleared and the normal  
display appears.  
NOTE  
A misfeed may occur inside the compartment, so  
please check the entire compartment carefully.  
Misfeed in the tray 4  
To remove a misfeed in tray 4, follow the same steps as in "Misfeed in paper tray 3".  
2-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in the bypass tray  
Remove the misfed paper from the bypass  
tray.  
1
5 Remove the misfed paper.  
Check the  
paper  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
transfer unit inside the  
tray and remove any  
misfed paper.  
6 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.  
If you did not find a misfeed in step 1, open  
the side cover and remove the misfeed.  
2
Push the tray all the way  
back in.  
Make sure that the  
misfeed message no  
longer appears (the  
normal message display  
should appear).  
3 Gently close the side cover.  
4 Remove tray 1 - tray 2.  
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the unit.  
Pull the tray all the way  
out until it stops.  
NOTE  
If a misfeed occurs during printing from the bypass  
tray while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2,  
push tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it, and then pull  
the tray out again.  
2-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC6)  
Open the top cover and remove the misfed  
paper.  
1 Open the side cover.  
6
After  
removing  
the  
misfed paper, close the  
top cover.  
2 Remove the misfed paper.  
2
7 Remove tray 1 - tray 2.  
Be careful not to tear the  
Grasp the finger hold  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
and gently open the unit.  
Pull the tray all the way  
out until it stops.  
3 Gently close the side cover.  
NOTE  
If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push  
tray 1 - tray 2 back in to close it and then pull the tray  
out again:  
A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 while  
paper is being loaded in tray 1 or tray 2.  
8 Remove the misfed paper.  
Check the  
paper  
4 Close the bypass tray.  
transfer unit inside the  
tray and remove any  
misfed paper.  
9 Gently close paper tray 1 - tray 2.  
Push the tray all the way  
back in.  
5 Open the top cover of tray 5.  
Make sure that the  
misfeed message no  
longer appears (the  
normal message display  
should appear).  
2-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MISFEED REMOVAL  
Misfeed in the tray 5 (AR-LC7)  
If a paper misfeed occurs, follow the steps below to remove the misfeed.  
1 Open the side cover.  
6 Remove the misfed paper.  
Be careful not to tear  
the misfed paper  
during removal.  
After removing the  
misfed paper, close the  
top cover.  
2 Remove the misfed paper.  
7 Pull out tray 1 - tray 2.  
Be careful not to tear  
the misfed paper  
during removal.  
Grasp the finger hold  
and gently open the  
tray.  
Pull the tray all the way  
out until it stops.  
NOTE  
3 Gently close the side cover.  
If a misfeed occurs in the following situation, push tray  
1 - tray 2 back in and then pull the tray out again:  
A misfeed occurs during printing from tray 5 (AR-  
LC7) while paper is being loaded in tray 1 - tray 2.  
8 Remove the misfed paper.  
Check the  
transfer unit inside the  
tray. If there is  
paper  
4 Close the bypass tray.  
a
misfeed in the paper  
transfer unit, remove  
the misfeed.  
9 Gently push tray 1-tray 2 into the machine.  
Push the tray firmly all  
the way into the  
machine.  
5 Open the top cover of the AR-LC7 (tray 5).  
Make sure that the  
misfeed message no  
longer appears (the  
Hold the top cover  
open.  
normal  
message  
display should appear).  
2-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REMOVING AN ORIGINAL MISFEED  
Removing a misfed original from the automatic document feeder  
If an original misfeed occurs in the automatic document feeder, follow the steps below to remove the misfed original.  
NOTES  
For misfeed removal in the main unit and other peripheral devices, see page 2-23  
When a misfeed occurs, touch the [INFORMATION] key to display detailed information for misfeed removal.  
Check locations A and B in the diagram at left to  
remove the original.  
2
Open and close the document feeder  
cover.  
1 Removing misfeeds from each location.  
2
Check location A  
Opening and closing the  
cover clears the misfeed  
display. Copying cannot  
be resumed until this  
step is performed.  
Open the document  
feeder cover and gently  
remove  
the  
misfed  
original without tearing  
it. Close the document  
feeder cover.  
However, this step is not  
necessary  
misfeed is removed from location B.  
after  
a
A message may appear indicating the number of  
originals which must be returned to the document  
feeder tray. Return the originals to the document  
feeder tray and press the [START] key.  
Check location B  
Misfeed in the transfer unit  
Open the document  
transfer cover, hold the  
paper guide open, and  
remove  
original.  
the  
misfed  
Misfeed in the document exit unit  
Open the document  
transfer cover. Rotate  
the transfer roller in the  
direction of the arrow  
and gently remove the  
original without tearing it.  
2-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you  
are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, unplug the  
power cord.  
Problems related to general use of the machine are described below. For problems related to the copy function, see  
page 6-3. For problems related to document filing, see page 7-31. For fax, printer, and network scanner/Internet fax  
problems, see the manuals for those functions. For peripheral device problems, see the explanation of the device.  
(Note)  
If the message "CALL FOR SERVICE. CODE:**-**"  
appears in the touch panel, turn off the main power switch  
and the power switch, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the main power switch and the power switch back on.  
If the message still appears after turning the main power switch and the power switch off and on several times, it  
is likely that a failure has occurred that requires service. In this event, stop using the machine, unplug the power  
cord, and contact your Sharp dealer.  
Note: Letters and numbers appear in "**-**". When you contact your Sharp dealer, please tell your dealer what  
letters and numbers appear.  
Problem  
Check  
Machine plugged in?  
Solution or cause  
Plug the machine into a grounded outlet.  
The main power switch and power Turn on the main power switch and the power  
switch are not turned on?  
switch. (Page 1-17)  
The printer is warming up. (Warm-up time is  
approximately 120 seconds.) Wait until the  
READY indicator lights up.  
READY indicator off?  
The machine does  
not operate.  
Message indicating need to load paper  
displayed?  
Load paper. (Page 2-2)  
Message indicating need to replace the  
toner cartridge displayed?  
Replace the toner cartridge. (Page 2-21)  
Remove misfed paper. (Page 2-23)  
Message indicating a paper misfeed  
displayed?  
A message appears saying that this type Two-sided printing is not possible on special  
of paper cannot be used for two-sided paper. Use paper that can be used for automatic  
Copying/printing is  
not possible.  
copying.  
two-sided printing. (Page 2-13)  
Incorrect display of paper sizes , A3, B4, When loading sizes A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",  
A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13" or 8-1/2" x 11"R, be  
Incorrect  
tray paper size.  
bypass  
or 8-1/2" x 11"R only.  
The number of sheets placed on the bypass Do not place more than the maximum number of  
tray exceeds the maximum number. sheets.  
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded  
size of the loaded paper. paper.  
sure to open the tray extension.  
Copying/printing on  
paper from the  
bypass  
tray  
is  
skewed.  
2-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Problem  
Check  
Solution or cause  
Be sure to set the paper size and paper type  
when using special size or special type papers.  
(Page 2-14)  
The paper size and paper type have not  
been set.  
Paper from the  
bypass  
misfeeds.  
tray The number of sheets placed on the bypass Do not place more than the maximum number of  
tray exceeds the maximum number. sheets.  
The bypass guide is not adjusted to the Adjust the bypass guide to the size of the loaded  
size of the loaded paper.  
paper.  
If too many pages collect on the output  
tray, the tray full sensor activates and Remove the paper from the output tray.  
stops printing.  
Printing  
before the job is  
finished.  
stops  
2
The paper tray is out of paper.  
Load paper. (Page 2-2)  
Smudges on printed Does a message appear indicating the Please contact the your dealer as soon as  
sheets  
need for maintenance?  
possible.  
When loading paper, if you change the paper  
size from an AB size to an inch size, or from an  
inch size to an AB size, or change the paper  
type, be sure to set the new paper type as  
size" (see page 2-14).  
The displayed paper  
size or paper type The correct paper size or paper type is  
does not match the not set in the paper tray settings of the  
loaded paper size or system settings.  
paper type.  
When printing on a  
When using a special size of paper, set the  
special  
size  
of The paper size setting is not set correct paper size as explained in "Setting the  
paper, part of the correctly in the paper tray settings of the paper type and paper size" on page 2-14. If the  
printed image is system settings.  
missing.  
paper size setting is not correct, part of the image  
may be cut off or the image may not be printed.  
When printing on a  
special size of paper  
using the bypass The paper size is not set correctly in the  
tray, part of the special size settings for the bypass tray.  
printed image is  
When using a special size of paper, set the  
correct paper size as explained in "Setting the  
paper type and paper size" on page 2-14. If the  
paper size setting is not correct, part of the image  
may be cut off or the image may not be printed.  
missing.  
Is  
paper  
other  
than  
SHARP-  
Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22  
)
recommended paper being used?  
Do not use curled or crimped paper. If you will  
not use the paper for a long time, remove the  
paper from the tray and store it in the wrapper in  
a cool and dark location so that it will not absorb  
moisture.  
Paper curled or damp?  
Paper may be curled when output depending on  
the paper type and quality.  
In some cases turning the paper over in the tray  
Is the paper curled and does it  
frequently misfeed in the finisher or  
saddle stitch finisher?  
Paper  
misfeeds  
will reduce misfeeding due to curling.  
frequently.  
Remove the paper  
from the paper  
tray or the bypass  
tray, fan the paper  
as shown in the  
Multiple  
simultaneously?  
sheets  
of  
paper  
fed  
illustration,  
and  
then load it again.  
Make sure that the paper in the paper tray is  
stacked evenly. If the stack is not even, paper  
misfeeds will occur.  
The paper in the tray is not stacked  
evenly.  
2-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Problem  
Check  
other than  
recommended paper being used?  
Solution or cause  
Is  
paper  
SHARP-  
Use SHARP-recommended paper. (Page 2-22  
)
Is the paper size or weight outside the  
specifications?  
Use paper within the specifications.  
Printed paper is  
wrinkled or the  
Be sure to store paper in the wrapper in a dry  
location and do not store paper in a location that is  
humid  
image  
easily.  
rubs  
off  
at a high temperature or an extremely low  
Paper damp?  
temperature  
exposed to direct sunlight  
dusty.  
The contrast on the  
touch panel is too Is LCD contrast properly adjusted?  
high or too low.  
Adjust the screen contrast using "DISPLAY  
CONTRAST" in "DEFAULT SETTINGS" of the  
system settings. (Page 2-20)  
Load paper in the tray with the print side face up.  
However, if the paper type is "PRE-PRINTED" or  
"LETTER HEAD", load the paper with the print  
side face down*.  
* If the two-sided function has been prohibited  
using "DISABLING OF DUPLEX" in the  
administrator settings (page 11 of the  
administrator settings guide), load the paper  
face up.  
The paper is loaded in the tray with the  
Printing takes place  
print side face down*.  
on the wrong side of  
* Face up if the paper type is "PRE-  
the paper.  
PRINTED" or "LETTER HEAD".  
If the original image overlaps the punch holes,  
marks will appear at the position of the holes on  
the back of the paper after one-sided printing, or  
on the front and back of the paper after two-sided  
printing. Make sure that the original image does  
not overlap the punch holes.  
Marks appear at  
regular intervals on Paper with punch holes is being used.  
printed pages.  
2-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 3  
PERIPHERAL DEVICES  
This chapter explains the procedures for using the optional finisher,  
saddle stitch finisher, and inserter, as well as Sharp OSA (application  
communication module and external account module).  
Page  
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER........................................ 3-2  
Part names...................................................................................... 3-2  
Specifications.................................................................................. 3-2  
Finishing methods........................................................................... 3-4  
Finishing modes and finisher functions........................................... 3-6  
Removing a misfeed........................................................................ 3-11  
INSERTER.............................................................................................. 3-14  
Part names...................................................................................... 3-14  
Specifications.................................................................................. 3-14  
Loading paper ................................................................................. 3-15  
Manual operation of the inserter ..................................................... 3-15  
Misfeed removal.............................................................................. 3-17  
Troubleshooting inserter problems.................................................. 3-18  
SHARP OSA........................................................................................... 3-19  
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)..................... 3-19  
Standard application setup.............................................................. 3-19  
Selecting a standard application ..................................................... 3-19  
Operation in OSA mode.................................................................. 3-20  
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3) ...................................... 3-21  
External account application setup ................................................. 3-21  
Operation in external account mode ............................................... 3-21  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
The finisher and the saddle stitch finisher include the offset function, which offsets each set of copies from the  
preceding set for easy separation. Each set of sorted copies can also be stapled. The saddle stitch finisher can  
automatically staple a set of copies at the centre line and fold the pages to create a pamphlet.  
A punch module unit can be installed to add punch holes to copies, and an inserter can be installed to insert blank  
pages at specified pages.  
In the following explanations, the finisher and saddle stitch finisher are referred to simply as "finisher".  
Part names  
1
Tray  
Offset pages and stapled  
pages are delivered here.  
2
Stapler compiler  
Paper to be stapled is stacked  
temporarily.  
3
Top cover  
Open for misfeed removal.  
4
Punch module (Option)  
Adds punch holes to printed pages.  
Finisher  
(AR-F15)  
Saddle stitch  
finisher (AR-F16)  
5
6
7
Front cover  
Open to replace the staple  
case in the staple unit or clear  
jammed staples.  
Lower cover  
Open to clear misfed paper or  
replace the staple cartridge in the  
pamphlet unit. (AR-F16 only)  
Saddle stitch tray  
Saddle stitched output is  
delivered here.  
Saddle stitch finisher  
(AR-F16)  
Finisher (AR-F15)  
(AR-F16 only)  
*
The illustrations on the following pages (to page 3-18) show the AR-F16; however, the operation of the AR-F15  
is the same as the AR-F16.  
NOTES  
Do not press on the finisher.  
Use caution when near the offset tray during printing as the tray moves up and down.  
Specifications  
Name  
Finisher (AR-F15)  
Saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16)  
3
Face down output  
Number of trays  
Paper output  
2
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:  
Non-stapling:  
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:  
Non-stapling:  
2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate 2000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness  
thickness is within 250mm (9-53/64"):  
is within 250mm (9-53/64"): A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x  
2
A4, B5, A5R, 8-1/2" x 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R 11" or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, (80  
g/m (20 lbs.))  
2
(80  
g
/m (20 lbs.))  
1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate thickness is  
1000 sheets of paper or total aggregate within 140mm (5-1/2"): Sizes other than the above  
Paper capacity  
thickness is within 140mm (5-1/2")  
Sizes other than the above  
Stapling:  
:
Stapling:  
100 sets or 750 pages or total aggregate thickness is  
within 110mm (4-5/16") of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" x 11" paper.  
100 sets or 750 pages of A4, B5 or 8-1/2" 100 sets or 500 pages or total aggregate thickness  
is within 74mm (2-29/32") of other sizes of paper  
x 11" paper.  
100 sets or 500 pages of other sizes of Lower tray:  
paper  
Stapled print capacity is (11 - 15) sheets x 10 sets, (6  
- 10) sheets x 20 sets, (1 - 5) sheets x 25 sets.  
(Continued on next page)  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:  
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17",  
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8- 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2"  
1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8- x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R  
Paper size  
1/2"R  
Lower tray:  
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R  
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:  
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray/Lower tray:  
Paper weight  
2
2
60 to 256 g/m (16 to 68* lbs.)  
60 to 256 g/m (16 to 68* lbs.)  
Paper full detection  
Both upper and lower tray  
Upper, middle and lower tray  
Paper sizes for which  
offset is possible  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R  
Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray: Upper paper tray/Middle paper tray:  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14",  
14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R  
Allowed paper sizes for  
stapling  
11"R  
Lower tray:  
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R  
Maximum number of  
sheets for stapling  
3
Stapling positions  
Paper conveying  
Power supply  
1 place at back, 1 place at back (diagonal), one place at front (diagonal), 2 places  
Centre reference  
Supplied from machine  
When tray is folded up: 648 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H)  
(25-33/64" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))  
When tray is extended: 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) x1150 mm(H)  
(30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) x 45-9/32" (H))  
Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Approx. 51 kg (Approx. 113 lbs.)  
Approx. 71 kg (Approx. 157 lbs.  
)
Overall dimensions when 773 mm (W) x 630 mm (D) (Separation from machine 400 mm)  
attached to machine (30-7/16" (W) x 24-13/16" (D) (Separation from machine 15-3/4"))  
*For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.  
Name  
Punch module  
1
2
3
3
Model*  
AR-PN4A  
2
AR-PN4B*  
3 or 2  
AR-PN4C*  
4
AR-PN4D*  
4
Number of holes  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, 3 holes: A3, A4,  
B5R, 11" x 17",  
11"x17", 8-1/2"x14", 8-1/2" x 11"  
A3, A4  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,  
B5R,  
11"x17", 8-1/2"x14",  
8-1/2"x13",  
8-1/2"x11",  
8-1/2"x11"R  
Paper sizes for hole  
punching  
8-1/2"x13",  
8-1/2"x11",  
8-1/2"x11"R  
2 holes: 8-1/2"x14",  
8-1/2"x13",  
8-1/2" x 11"R  
2
Paper weight  
Power supply  
Dimensions  
Weight  
60 to 256  
Supplied from finisher / saddle stitch finisher  
95 mm (W) x 560 mm (D) x 170 mm (H) (3-3/4 (W) x 22-1/16  
Approx. 3.5 kg (Approx. 7.8 lbs.)  
g/m (16 to 68 lbs.)  
"
"
(D) x 6-45/64" (H))  
*1 Multiple punch modules cannot be installed together. Some models may not be available in some regions.  
*2 With AR-PN4B, two or three holes can be punched depending on the paper size.  
*3 With AR-PN4C and AR-PN4D, the number of holes is the same. The hole interval, however, is not the same.  
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.  
NOTES  
The following papers cannot be stapled and punched:  
Special papers such as transparency film and label sheets  
If mixed paper sizes are selected for stapling jobs, stapling will be automatically cancelled.  
Supplies  
The finisher and saddle stitch finisher require the following staple cartridge:  
Staple cartridge for finisher  
(approx. 5,000 per cartridge  
X 3 cartridges)  
Staple cartridge for saddle  
stitch finisher (approx. 2000  
per cartridge X 3 cartridges)  
AR-SC3  
SF-SC11  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Finishing methods  
Sort mode  
Offset mode  
Sorted sets will be delivered.  
Offset mode  
Non-offset mode  
Original  
Printouts  
Group mode  
Each set of copies is offset from the preceding set to  
allow easy separation.  
(The offset function operates in the finisher / saddle  
stitch finisher tray.)  
Groups of copies of the same page will be  
delivered.  
The offset function cannot be selected when the  
staple sort function is selected.  
Offset width : Approx. 30 mm (Approx. 1-3/16")  
Original  
Printouts  
Staple sort mode  
Output pages are sorted into sets by the sort function, and each set is stapled and delivered to the tray. The centre  
of the paper can also be stapled and delivered to the lower saddle tray (only when using the saddle stitch finisher).  
The relations between possible stapling positions, the paper feed direction, paper sizes that can be used, and  
number of pages that can be stapled are shown below.  
2
Two sheets (one sheet when using the saddle stitch function) of 256 g/m (68 lbs.) paper can be included as  
covers in the page stapling limit in the table below.  
Stapling positions  
Portrait orientation  
Landscape orientation  
Top left corner of  
printouts  
Available paper sizes:  
A4, B5 and 8-1/2" x 11"  
Stapling capacity:  
Available paper sizes:  
A3, B4, 11" x 17"  
Stapling capacity:  
For each size, up to 50 sheets  
can be stapled  
For each size, up to 30 sheets  
can be stapled  
Available paper sizes:  
A4R, 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",  
8-1/2" x 11"R  
Stapling capacity:  
For each size, up to 30 sheets  
can be stapled  
Available paper sizes:  
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",  
8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",  
8-1/2" x 11"R  
Lower left corner  
of printouts  
Same as above  
Same as above  
Stapling capacity:  
For each size, up to 30 sheets  
can be stapled  
Centre left two  
positions of  
printouts  
Same as above  
Available paper sizes:  
A3, B4, A4R, 11" x 17",  
8-1/2" x 11"R,  
Saddle stitch on  
centrefold line.  
(only when using  
the saddle stitch  
finisher)  
Paper in the portrait  
direction cannot be saddle  
stitched.  
Stapling capacity:  
For each size, up to 15 sheets  
can be stapled  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Original orientation when using the staple sort or punch function  
When using the staple sort or punch function, the original must be placed in the following orientations to enable  
stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper.  
Staple sort  
Document feeder  
Punch  
Document feeder  
Document glass  
Document glass  
3
Saddle stitch function (only saddle stitch finisher)  
The saddle stitch finisher can automatically place  
two staples for centreline binding of prints or copies  
and fold them along the centreline.  
<Example>  
6
7
9
4
2
11  
Hole punching (only if a punch module is installed)  
When the optional punch module is installed, holes  
can be punched in printed pages. (When using the  
saddle stitch finisher, pamphlet style stapling and  
the punch function cannot be used together.) When  
using the punch function, automatic rotation of the  
original image does not operate.  
<Example>  
{Original 1}  
{Punch positions}  
For the allowed paper sizes for punching, see the  
specifications on page 3-3.  
When using the punch function in copy mode,  
place the original with the top toward the inside of  
the machine. If the original is not placed in this  
orientation, punching will not take place at the  
correct positions. (See "Standard original  
{Original 2}  
{Punch positions}  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Finishing modes and finisher functions  
Touch the [OUTPUT] key on the main screen of copy mode to display the screen that allows selection of sort, staple  
sort, group function, centreline stapling, and the output tray.  
0
OUTPUT  
SORT  
OK  
FINISHER  
TRAY  
CENTRE  
TRAY  
STAPLE  
SORT  
SADDLE  
STITCH  
PUNCH  
GROUP  
OFFSET  
1
2
6
[GROUP] key (See page 3-4.)  
[CENTRE TRAY] key  
When Group is selected, copies will be grouped by  
page.  
If the centre tray is selected, output paper will be  
delivered to the exit tray located above the main  
unit.  
[STAPLE SORT] key (See page 3-4.)  
7
8
[OK] key  
When Staple Sort is selected, sorted sets will be  
stapled and delivered to the offset tray. (They will  
not be offset stacked.) Select from three stapling  
positions.  
Touch to close the [OUTPUT] screen and return to  
the main screen.  
[SADDLE STITCH] key (See page 3-5.)  
3
4
[SORT] key (See page 3-4.)  
This is displayed when the saddle stitch finisher is  
installed, and is used to staple pages at the centre  
and fold them in half to create a pamphlet.  
Touch this key to display the pamphlet copy  
setting screen (page 5-6). (This is only possible  
when the [AUTOMATIC SADDLE STITCH]  
checkbox is selected in the administrator settings  
(see page 12 of the administrator settings guide).)  
When Sort is selected, sets of copies will be  
collated.  
[FINISHER TRAY] key (See page 3-2.)  
When the offset function is selected, output is  
delivered offset to the finisher tray. (The finisher  
tray is automatically selected when the staple sort  
function is turned on.)  
9
[PUNCH] key (See page 3-5.)  
This is used to punch holes in printed pages when  
an optional punch module is installed.  
5
[OFFSET] key (See page 3-4.)  
The offset function operates when a checkmark  
appears in this key. (The offset checkmark is  
automatically cleared when the staple sort function  
is enabled.)  
NOTE  
When a functions is selected, it is highlighted.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Staple cartridge replacement and staple jam removal  
When a finisher is installed, a message will appear when the staple cartridge runs out of staples or a staple jam  
occurs.  
Follow the procedure below to replace the staple cartridge or remove jammed staples.  
Replacing the cartridge in the finisher  
Pull the seal that holds the staples straight  
out.  
1 Open the front cover of the finisher.  
5
6
3
Insert the cartridge all the way in until it  
clicks into place.  
Lower the blue lever in the stapler and  
2
slide out the staple cartridge.  
Insert the cartridge all  
the way in until it clicks  
into place.  
7 Close the front cover of the finisher.  
Pull the empty staple case straight up and  
out of the cartridge.  
3
NOTE  
Insert a new staple case into the cartridge.  
4
Make a test print or copy in the staple sort mode to  
verify that stapling is performed properly.  
Push the staple case all the way in until it  
clicks into place.  
Do not remove the seal  
holding the staples until  
the staple case is set in  
the cartridge.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Replacing the cartridge in the saddle stitch finisher  
Only when the saddle stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed.  
Return the saddle stitch holder and the  
saddle stitch unit to their respective  
original positions.  
Open the lower cover of the saddle stitch  
finisher.  
5
1
2
3
When  
an  
optional  
inserter is installed,  
open the front cover of  
the  
inserter  
before  
opening the lower cover  
of the finisher.  
Slide out the saddle stitch unit carefully  
toward the front.  
Make sure that the finisher is firmly  
attached to the machine and that A3, A4R,  
or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x  
14") size paper is loaded.  
6
If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test  
stapling cannot be performed.  
7 Close the lower cover of the finisher.  
(1) Grasp the grip of the saddle staple  
holder and pull it out.  
(2) While still grasping the grip, rotate the  
saddle staple holder 90° in the direction of  
the arrow (rotate to the right).  
(2)  
Test  
stapling  
is  
automatically performed  
on a blank sheet.  
This operation is carried  
out to avoid blank  
stapling.  
(1)  
NOTE  
If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.  
Remove the empty staple case and set a  
new one.  
4
Replace both staple  
cases with new ones.  
Remove the cover from  
the staple cartridge and  
then install the cartridge.  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Removing a staple jam in the finisher  
Holding the knob, return part (A) to its  
original position.  
Perform steps 1 to 2 of the procedure for  
"Replacing the cartridge in the finisher"  
on page 3-7.  
4
5
1
2 Holding the knob, lower part (A).  
Stapling area  
(A)  
Return the staple case to its original  
position.  
(A)  
Insert the cartridge all  
the way in until it clicks  
into place.  
3
NOTE  
Do not touch the stapling area.  
The stapler could injure you.  
3 Remove any jammed staples.  
6 Close the front cover of the finisher.  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Removing a staple jam in the saddle stitch finisher  
Return the staple case to its original  
position.  
Perform steps 1 to 3 of the procedure for  
5
1
2 Remove the empty staple case.  
Return the saddle stitch holder and the  
saddle stitch unit to their respective  
original positions.  
6
7
While pushing down on lever (A), pull up  
knob (B) .  
Make sure that the finisher is firmly  
attached to the machine and that A3, A4R,  
or B4 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 11"R, or 8-1/2" x  
14") size paper is loaded.  
3
(A)  
(B)  
If one of the above paper sizes is not set, test  
stapling cannot be performed.  
8 Close the lower cover of the finisher.  
Test stapling is automatically performed on a blank  
sheet.  
Remove any jammed staples, and then  
return knob (B) to its original position.  
4
This operation is carried out to avoid blank  
stapling.  
(B)  
Be sure to remove any  
strips of staples.  
NOTE  
If test stapling fails to take place, repeat steps 1 to 7.  
Jammed staples  
NOTE  
Do not touch the stapling area.  
The stapler could injure you.  
Disposal of hole punch scrap (when the punch module is installed)  
Holding the black handle, slide out the  
case containing the paper bits, and  
dispose of them properly.  
1 Open the cover of the hole punch module.  
2
Return the waste case to its original  
position.  
3
4 Close the cover of the hole punch module.  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Removing a misfeed  
When a misfeed occurs, remove the misfed paper as explained below.  
General procedure for the finisher and saddle stitch finisher  
Gently move the finisher/saddle stitch  
finisher away from the machine while  
pressing the button.  
Remove any misfed paper from the paper  
exit area.  
1
6
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
When an inserter is  
installed, separate the  
inserter  
from  
the  
machine while pressing  
on the inserter button.  
Close the upper cover of the finisher/  
saddle stitch finisher.  
7
Remove the misfed paper from the main  
unit.  
3
2
3
4
After  
removing  
the  
misfed paper, perform  
steps 1 and 3 on page 2-  
24 to reset the machine.  
When a saddle stitch finisher is installed  
Open the front cover of the inserter (only  
when an inserter is installed).  
Open the upper cover of the finisher/  
saddle stitch finisher.  
8
When an inserter is  
installed, lift the tray of  
the inserter.  
(A)  
Lift knob (A) (See the step 3 figure), then  
remove any misfed paper.  
Open the lower cover of the saddle stitch  
finisher.  
9
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
(B)  
Lift knob (B) (see the illustration in step 4)  
and remove any misfed paper.  
Be careful not to tear the  
Open the entrance cover of the saddle  
stitch unit.  
5
10  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Close the lower cover of the saddle stitch  
finisher.  
11Remove the misfed paper.  
17  
18  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Close the front cover of the inserter (only  
when an inserter is installed).  
Close the entrance cover of the saddle  
stitch unit.  
12  
13  
1
Turn the right-hand knob  
clockwise. Then, push the left-hand knob  
counter  
When a punch module is installed  
19Open the cover of the hole punch module.  
2
and turn it clockwise.  
Rotate the green knob until the arrow is  
20  
Remove any paper misfed on the exit side  
of the saddle stitch unit.  
Be careful not to tear the  
14  
15  
16  
within the range (A) on the label, and  
remove the misfed paper.  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
(A)  
removal.  
Open the exit cover of the saddle stitch  
unit and remove any misfed paper.  
Be careful not to tear the  
21Close the cover of the hole punch module.  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Close the exit cover of the saddle stitch  
unit.  
Push the finisher back against the main  
unit.  
22  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FINISHER AND SADDLE STITCH FINISHER  
Troubleshooting finisher/saddle stitch finisher problems  
Check the list below before calling for service.  
Problem  
Check  
Solution or cause  
Stapling position is  
not  
(including  
stitch).  
correct  
saddle  
Check the stapling position setting. (See page  
3-4.)  
Stapling position not set properly?  
Are any finisher/saddle stitch finisher Close all covers. (See step 7 on page 3-7 and  
covers open?  
step 7 on page 3-11.)  
The finisher/saddle  
stitch finisher does  
not operate.  
Remove all remaining paper from the stapler  
compiler. (For the stapler compiler, see "Part  
Message indicating need to remove paper  
from the stapler compiler displayed?  
Message to check the staple unit Remove jammed staples. (See pages 3-9 and  
displayed?  
3-10.)  
Replace the staple cartridge. (See pages 3-7  
and 3-8.) Check that a staple cartridge has  
been installed. (See pages 3-7 and 3-8.)  
3
Message to add staples displayed?  
Stapling cannot be  
performed (including  
saddle stitch).  
Stapling cannot be performed on mixed paper  
sizes.  
Different sizes of paper mixed together?  
The paper is badly curled.  
The quality and type of some papers may  
cause bad curling that prevents stapling.  
Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray,  
turn the stack over, and reload it.  
Saddle stitch is not possible on heavy paper.  
Saddle stitch cannot The paper type of the selected paper tray However, when cover insertion is selected,  
be selected.  
is set to heavy paper.  
saddle stitch is possible on a single sheet of  
heavy paper inserted for use as a cover.  
The punch hole  
positions are not  
correct.*  
The punch function is not set to the correct Check the allowed hole punch positions. (See  
punch positions.  
page 3-5.)  
Message to check the punch module  
displayed?  
Dispose of punch scraps. (See page 3-10.)  
Punching is not possible when different paper  
sizes are mixed together.  
Mixed paper sizes.  
Cannot be punched.*  
The quality and type of some papers may  
cause bad curling that prevents punching.  
Take the paper out of the tray or bypass tray,  
turn the stack over, and reload it.  
The paper is badly curled.  
* When a hole punch module is installed  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INSERTER  
The inserter enables blank sheets or printed sheets to be added to copy and print output as covers or inserts  
without printing. The inserter also allows feeding of heavy paper that cannot be fed from the other trays.  
Printed output can also be fed one set at a time from the inserter for stapling or punching without performing  
stapling or staple sorting finishing (see "Manual operation of the inserter" (page 3-15)).  
When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or  
transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select "INSERTER" in step 4 of "Setting the paper type and paper size"  
(page 2-14), and be sure to perform steps 5 through 8. In step 9, make sure that the checkboxes below "PRINT",  
"COPY", and "DOC. FILING" are selected. If any of these checkboxes are not selected, touch them so that a  
checkmark appears.  
When feeding from the inserter for pamphlet copying (page 5-6), cover or insert copying (page 5-12), or  
transparency insert copying (page 5-23), select the inserter in the tray settings. The inserter attributes can also  
be selected in the system settings (see page 2-18).  
Part names  
1
Paper tray  
Place blank or printed paper here to be inserted.  
2
Paper guide  
When loading paper, adjust this guide to the width of the paper.  
3
Top cover  
Open for misfeed removal.  
4
Inserter operation panel  
Stapling and punching can be performed directly  
from the inserter operation panel without using the  
machine operation panel.  
5
Paper guide lever  
Release the paper guide lock to remove misfed paper.  
6
Front cover  
Open this cover to remove misfed paper from the  
finisher or saddle stitch finisher.  
NOTE  
To install the inserter...  
An optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher must be installed (page 3-2).  
Specifications  
Name  
Inserter (AR-CF2)  
2
Paper weight  
60 to 256 g/m (16 lbs. to 68* lbs.) *For index paper, equivalent to 140-lbs.  
Plain paper, special paper (transparency film, coloured paper, paper with punch holes,  
tabbed paper, etc.)  
Paper types  
(Consult your retailer for more information on special papers that can be used.)  
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13",  
8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 11"R, 7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R  
Paper size  
2
Paper capacity  
Paper conveying  
Power supply  
Max. 100 (80 g/m (20 lbs.))  
Centre reference  
Supplied from machine  
When paper tray is folded up: 285 (565*) mm (W) x 585 mm (D) x 1120 mm (H)  
(11-15/64" (22-1/4"*) (W) x 23-3/64" (D) x 44-7/64" (H))  
Not including stopper (40 mm (1-37/64")) when attached to machine  
* Including paper tray  
Dimensions  
Weight  
Approx. 24 kg (Approx. 53 lbs.)  
Specifications are subject to change for improvement without notice.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
INSERTER  
Loading paper  
When loading paper in the inserter, load the paper face up. If the paper has a top edge and bottom edge, load in  
the same top-bottom orientation as the original. Adjust the paper guide on the paper tray to the width of the paper.  
When using tabbed paper, place the paper as follows:  
Load the paper back  
side up.  
The top side is  
inserted first.  
Back side  
The relation of copies and tabbed sheets is shown below.  
Load tabbed paper  
Copy  
Back  
side  
Back  
side  
Back  
side  
Inserted first.  
3
1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheet 4th sheet 5th sheet  
5th sheet  
1st sheet  
4th sheet  
Back  
side  
Tabbed paper 4th sheet (back side)  
Copy result  
Tabbed paper 1st sheet (back side)  
Manual operation of the inserter  
The inserter can be used for stapling or punching without performing a copy operation. These functions are selected  
at the operation panel of the inserter.  
1
2
3
[PUNCH] key  
[START] key/indicator  
1
When a punch module is installed on the finisher  
or saddle stitch finisher, punch holes can be  
added to blank paper or printed paper. The  
indicator lights when this function is selected.  
After selecting punch or staple settings with key  
2
or key  
, place the paper to be punched or  
stapled on the inserter tray and press this key.  
[STAPLE] key/indicator  
When this function is selected, each set of output  
is stapled and delivered to the finisher or saddle  
stitch finisher tray. (Note that the sets are not  
offset.) Press this key until the icon light of the  
desired staple position lights up. (" " pamphlet  
stapling can only be selected when a saddle stitch  
finisher is installed)  
NOTES  
Do not use tabbed paper when operating the inserter manually.  
The punching and stapling functions cannot be used when the finisher or saddle stitch finisher has failed, or  
when the functions are prohibited* in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).  
* Disabling of stapler/Disabling of punch/Disabling of finisher/Disabling of inserter  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
INSERTER  
Alarm display  
If the [START] key indicator on the inserter operation panel is blinking and the [PUNCH] key or [STAPLE] key  
indicator is also blinking or solidly lit, operation will not start when the [START] key is pressed. Resolve the  
problem as indicated below, depending how the indicators are lit or blinking.  
[PUNCH]  
indicator  
[START]  
indicator  
[STAPLE] indicator  
Cause  
Solution  
A paper size that cannot  
Blinks red be fed has been loaded.  
Use paper that is a suitable  
size for punching, stapling, or  
saddle stitching (page 3-3).  
Any one of the indicators is solidly lit.  
The paper type of the  
Blinks red inserter is set to heavy  
paper.  
Heavy paper cannot be  
used.  
Solidly  
lit  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
The finisher or saddle  
stitch finisher tray is full.  
Remove the paper from  
the tray.  
The hole punch scrap  
Blinks red  
Discard the hole punch  
scrap (page 3-10).  
Blinking  
-
-
container in the punch  
module on the finisher or  
saddle stitch finisher is full.  
The finisher or saddle  
stitch finisher tray is full.  
Remove the paper from  
the tray.  
Any one of the  
indicators is blinking.  
-
-
Blinks red  
Blinks red  
The finisher or saddle  
stitch finisher is out of  
staples.  
Replace the staple  
cartridge (page 3-7).  
The saddle stitch tray on  
the saddle stitch finisher is the saddle stitch tray.  
full.  
Remove the paper from  
-
-
-
Blinking  
The saddle stitch finisher is Replace the saddle stitch  
out of saddle stitch staples. staple cartridge (page 3-  
Using the inserter  
For paper sizes that can be stapled or punched, see the finisher and saddle stitch finisher specifications on  
page 3-2.  
Some paper types cannot be stapled or punched (see "NOTES" on page 3-3). Do not use these paper types.  
1 Load paper in the inserter.  
NOTE  
Pamphlet stapling can only be used when the saddle  
stitch finisher (AR-F16) is installed.  
Load the paper face up.  
When performing  
Paper guide  
pamphlet stapling, place  
the paper so that the  
opened pages are face  
up as shown.  
Adjust the paper guide  
to the size of the paper.  
When using pamphlet stapling, stapling and  
punching cannot be used in combination.  
3 Press the [START] key.  
Make sure that the  
[START] key light is  
illuminated green and  
then press the [START]  
key.  
2 Press the desired mode key.  
2
Press key on page 3-15 for stapling or pamphlet  
1
stapling. Press key  
on page 3-15 for punching.  
The selected mode lights up.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSERTER  
Misfeed removal  
When a misfeed occurs in the inserter, remove the misfed paper following the procedure below.  
Misfeed in the inserter  
6 Remove the misfed paper.  
Gently move the inserter away from the  
machine while pressing the button.  
1
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
If a misfeed was not found in step 6,  
remove the misfed paper from under the  
paper guide.  
Remove the misfed paper from the main  
unit.  
7
2
3
3
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
After  
removing  
the  
misfed paper, perform  
steps 1 and 3 on page 2-  
24 to reset the machine.  
If misfed paper is not found in step 2, open  
the top cover.  
Return the paper guide lever to its original  
position.  
8
9
4 Remove the misfed paper.  
Push the finisher to close the gap between  
the machine and the inserter.  
Be careful not to tear the  
misfed paper during  
removal.  
After  
attaching  
the  
inserter on the machine,  
make sure that the paper  
misfeed message has  
been cleared and the  
normal message display  
appears.  
If a misfeed was not found in step 4, raise  
the paper guide lever.  
5
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
INSERTER  
Troubleshooting inserter problems  
Check the list below before calling for service.  
Problem  
Check  
Solution or cause  
Select the desired staple mode at the  
operation panel of the inserter (page 3-15).  
The desired staple mode is not selected.  
Stapling position is  
not  
(including  
stitch).  
correct The paper is not loaded in the correct  
saddle position.  
Load the paper correctly (page 3-16).  
Paper must be loaded face up in the inserter  
tray (page 3-16).  
The paper is not loaded face up.  
Are any inserter covers open?  
Close all covers.  
"Disabling of inserter" is enabled in the Check the administrator settings and disable  
administrator settings.  
"Disabling of inserter".  
The inserter does  
not operate.  
A paper misfeed message appears.  
Remove the misfed paper (page 3-17).  
Make sure that the punch or staple key has  
been selected on the operation panel of the  
inserter (page 3-15).  
The [START] key light is not illuminated.  
The paper is curled or damp.  
Do not use curled or folded paper. When the  
inserter is not going to be used for a long time,  
remove the paper from the inserter, place it in  
a bag so that it does not absorb moisture, and  
store it in a cool and dark place.  
Paper  
misfeed  
occurs  
A
paper misfeed Do the size and orientation of the loaded  
Make sure paper size and orientation set in  
"Setting the paper type and paper size" match  
the size and orientation of the loaded paper.  
occurs when paper paper match the paper size and orientation  
is fed from the set in "Setting the paper type and paper  
inserter.  
size"?  
To ensure that the correct paper (size and  
orientation) is loaded in the inserter, the  
machine indicates the current paper size  
setting each time paper is placed in the paper  
tray.  
A message appears Was the [SIZE SELECT] key touched and  
each time paper is the size and orientation of the paper for the  
placed in the paper inserter set as explained in "Setting the  
tray of the inserter.  
paper type and paper size"?  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SHARP OSA  
Sharp OSA (Open Systems Architecture) is an architecture that enables external applications to be directly  
connected to a digital multifunction machine over a network.  
When a digital multifunction machine that supports Sharp OSA is used, the operation panel controls and functions  
of the machine such as scan send can be linked to an external application.  
There are two types of external applications: "standard application" and "external account application". An "external  
account application" is used for centralized account management of a multifunction machine on a network. A  
"standard application" refers to all other applications.  
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION  
MODULE (MX-AMX2)  
The application communication module is required to use a "standard application" on the machine.  
When a previously registered standard application is selected in the Web pages of the machine, the machine  
retrieves the operation screen from the registered URL. Control of the operation screen is performed by the standard  
application, and Scan to FTP can be executed.  
3
Standard application setup  
To register a standard application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the administrator menu  
frame and then click [Standard Applications]. Configure settings for the standard application in the screen that  
appears.  
Selecting a standard application  
There are two methods for selecting a standard application that has been registered in the machine's Web pages.  
Selecting a standard application from the job status screen  
The Sharp OSA icon will appear in the lower left-hand corner of the job status screen. Follow the steps below to  
select a standard application.  
1 Touch the Sharp OSA icon.  
2 Select the standard application.  
If  
no  
standard  
If two or more standard  
App 01  
App 02  
App 03  
App 04  
applications have been  
stored in the Web pages,  
the key cannot be  
touched.  
applications have been  
stored in the Web pages,  
the screen to select the  
standard application will  
appear.  
Touch  
the  
standard application that  
you wish to use.  
If only one standard application has been stored in  
the Web pages, connection to the standard  
application will begin.  
The machine connects to the standard  
application.  
3
The message "Connecting to the external  
application." appears while the machine  
communicates with the standard application.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE (MX-AMX2)  
Selecting the standard application from document filing mode  
The [Sharp OSA] key appears in the upper right-hand corner of the document filing screen. Follow the steps  
below to select a standard application.  
1 Touch the [Sharp OSA] key.  
2 Select the standard application.  
If  
no  
standard  
If one or more standard  
App 01  
App 02  
App 03  
App 04  
applications have been  
stored in the Web pages,  
the key cannot be  
touched.  
applications have been  
stored in the Web pages,  
the screen to select the  
standard application will  
Sharp OSA  
FILE TRIEVE  
F
FOLDER  
appear.  
standard application that  
you wish to use.  
Touch  
the  
QUICK FILE  
FOLDER  
If only one standard application has been stored in  
the Web pages, connection to the standard  
application will begin.  
The machine connects to the standard  
application.  
The message "Connecting to the external  
application." appears while the machine  
communicates with the standard application.  
3
Operation in OSA mode  
When the application communication module is installed, it is possible to check the job log of OSA scan mode in the  
job status screen. The procedure for displaying the job log is the same as for regular Scan to FTP.  
To display the job log of OSA scan mode, touch the [SCAN] key once again while the job log of scan mode appears  
in the job status screen. (When this is done, the name of the key will change to [OSA SCAN].) To return to the scan  
screen from the OSA scan screen, touch the [OSA SCAN] key.  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE (MX-AMX3)  
The external account module is required to use a "external account application" on the machine.  
An external account application can be used in "external authentication mode" or "external count mode". When  
external authentication mode is used, the login screen is retrieved from the application when the machine is started.  
When a job ends, a job notification screen is sent to the application to enable counts to be kept for each authenticated  
user.  
When "external count mode" is used, the login screen is not displayed when the machine is started. Only a job result  
notification is sent to the application. User authentication by the external account application cannot be used,  
however, the external account application can be used in combination with the internal account function.  
External account application setup  
To register an external account application in the machine's Web pages, click [External Applications] in the  
administrator menu frame and then click [External Accounting]. Configure settings for the external account  
application in the screen that appears. To make the settings in the Web page take effect, restart the machine.  
Operation in external account mode  
3
The two modes for using an external account application operate as explained below.  
External authentication mode  
When the [ENABLE AUTHENTICATION BY EXTERNAL SERVER] checkbox is selected in "External account  
setting" of "Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external authentication mode.  
When the machine is powered on in external authentication mode, the machine accesses the external account  
application and displays the login screen. The login screen also appears when the [CALL] key is touched to run  
a job in the job status complete screen. (The login screen does not appear if the user has already logged in by  
the normal method.)  
The [JOB STATUS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the job status screen. To return  
to the previous state, press the mode select key.  
NOTES  
The user control function of the machine cannot be used in external authentication mode.  
The [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key can be pressed while the login screen appears to show the system settings  
screen. To return to the initial state, touch the [EXIT] key.  
If login fails  
If the login screen fails to appear or the application does not operate correctly, the machine may also stop operating  
correctly. In this event, it is recommended that you quit external account mode from the Web pages of the machine.  
For more information, see [Help] in the Web pages.  
If it is necessary to forcibly terminate external account mode using the operation panel of the machine, follow the  
steps below.  
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and change "External account setting" in the administrator settings (see page  
14 of the administrator settings guide). After changing the setting, restart the machine.  
External count mode  
When only the [ENABLE EXTERNAL ACCOUNT CONTROL] setting is enabled in "External account setting" of  
"Sharp OSA settings" in the administrator settings, the machine enters external count mode.  
Unlike external authentication mode, when the machine is started in "external count mode", the login screen of  
the external account application is not displayed. Only the job result is sent to the external account application.  
External count mode can be used together with the user control function of the machine. (External count mode  
can also be used when the user control function is disabled.)  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part 2: Copier Operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 4  
MAKING COPIES  
This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies, including  
selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings.  
Page  
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER ...................................................... 4-2  
Acceptable originals........................................................................ 4-2  
PLACING ORIGINALS............................................................................ 4-3  
CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL................................. 4-5  
Manually setting the scanning size ................................................. 4-5  
Storing or deleting an original size.................................................. 4-6  
NORMAL COPYING............................................................................... 4-7  
function............................................................................................ 4-10  
Copying from the document glass................................................... 4-11  
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE .....................................................................4-14  
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM................................................... 4-15  
Automatic selection (auto image).................................................... 4-15  
Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom).................................... 4-16  
XY ZOOM........................................................................................ 4-18  
SPECIAL PAPERS.................................................................................. 4-20  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER  
The automatic document feeding function automatically feeds originals into the machine, making continuous copying  
possible. In addition, both sides of two-sided sheet originals can be simultaneously scanned. This function is  
convenient when you have a large number of original pages to scan.  
Acceptable originals  
2
Up to 150 originals (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) of the same size, or an overall stack height of no more than 19.5 mm (49/64"),  
can be loaded. Originals of mixed length can also be loaded together as long as they are the same width; however,  
some special functions may not operate correctly.  
Size and weight of acceptable  
Total number of originals that can be  
originals  
set in the document feeder tray  
2
Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) or  
A5 or  
5-1/2" x 8-1/2"  
total stack height of 19.5 mm (49/64") or less.  
Original size:  
A3 or  
11" x 17"  
(148 x 210 mm)  
Weight (thickness):  
(297 x 420 mm)  
50g/m2 or 14 lbs.  
128 g/m2 or 42 lbs.  
Special heavy papers  
2
(176 g/m2 (65 lbs.), 205 g/m (110 lbs.)) can be used.  
g/m2 ... Weight of a sheet of paper of 1 m2  
Notes on use of the automatic document feeder  
Use originals within the specified size and weight ranges. Use of originals out of the specified range may cause  
an original misfeed.  
Before loading originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips.  
If originals have damp spots from correction fluid, ink or glue from pasteups, be sure they are dried before they  
are fed. If not, the interior of the document feeder or the document glass may be soiled.  
Do not use the following originals. These originals may cause incorrect original size detection, original  
misfeeds, and smudges on copies.  
Transparency film, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink  
ribbon should not be fed through the document feeder. Originals to be fed through the feeder should not be  
damaged, crumpled or folded or have loosely pasted paper on them or cutouts in them. Originals with multiple  
punched holes other than two-hole or three-hole punched paper may not feed correctly.  
When using originals with two or three holes, place them so that the  
punched edge is at a position other than the feed slot.  
Hole positions  
Hole  
positions  
Hole positions  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PLACING ORIGINALS  
Using the automatic document  
Using the document glass  
feeder  
Open the document cover, make sure that  
an original has not been left on the  
document glass, and then gently close the  
document cover.  
Open the document cover, place the  
original face down on the document glass,  
and then gently close the document cover.  
1
NOTES  
Adjust the original guides to the size of the  
originals.  
2
After placing the original, be sure to close the  
document cover. If left open, parts outside of the  
original will be copied black, causing excessive  
use of toner.  
Do not place any objects under the original size  
detector, because they may damage it or the  
original size may not be detected properly.  
4
Place the originals face up in the  
document feeder tray.  
Document glass scale  
mark  
Document glass scale  
mark  
3
Place the originals face  
up.  
Insert the originals all  
B5  
the  
way  
into  
the  
A4 or 8½x11  
B4 or  
B5  
8½x14  
document feeder. The  
stack height must not be  
higher than the indicator  
A4 or 8½x11  
A3 or 11x17  
Align the corner of the original with the tip of the  
arrow mark on the document glass scale.  
line (maximum of 150 pages).  
Place the original in the appropriate position for its  
size as shown above.  
NOTE  
Original size detection function  
One of the four groups of standard original sizes shown below can be selected for detection by the original size  
detection function. The factory default setting is "AB-2". The setting can be changed using "ORIGINAL SIZE  
DETECTOR SETTING" in the administrator settings.  
Detectable original sizes  
Group  
Document feeder tray (for reversing automatic document feeding)  
Document glass  
1
2
AB-1  
AB-2  
A3, A4, A4R, A5,B4, B5, B5R  
Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", 216x330  
A3, A4, A4R, A5,B5, B5R, 216x330  
Document glass + 8-1/2" x 11", B4  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11",  
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"  
3
4
INCH-1  
INCH-2  
Document glass + A4  
11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11",  
8-1/2" x 11"R, 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"  
Document glass + A4  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PLACING ORIGINALS  
Standard original placement orientations  
[Example 1]  
Document feeder tray  
Document glass  
Place  
originals  
in  
the  
document feeder tray or on  
the document glass so that  
the top and bottom of the  
original is positioned as  
shown in the illustration. If not,  
staples will be incorrectly  
positioned and some special  
features may not give the  
expected result.  
[Example 2]  
Document feeder tray  
Document glass  
Automatic copy image rotation - rotation copying  
If the orientation of the originals and copy paper are different, the original image will be automatically rotated 90°  
and copied. (When an image is rotated, a message will be displayed.) If a function is selected that is not suitable  
for rotation, such as enlarging the copy to greater than A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size or staple sorting with the saddle  
stitch finisher, rotation will not be possible.  
[Example]  
Orientation of original  
Orientation of paper  
Copy after rotation  
Face down  
Face down  
This function operates in both the auto paper select or auto image mode. ("Rotation copy setting" can be  
disabled in the administrator settings. See page 16 of the administrator settings guide.)  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED  
ORIGINAL  
If the placed original is a standard size, the size will be automatically  
detected (automatic original detection function) and displayed in the touch  
panel. Make sure that the correct size has been detected.  
(A) :The original size is displayed.  
0
AUTO  
A4  
ORIGINAL  
(B) :[AUTO] appears when the automatic original detection function is  
operating.  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
If you have loaded a non-standard size original or wish to change the  
scanning size, you can follow the steps below to manually set the original  
scanning size. (For the standard sizes, see "Original size detection  
function" on page 4-3.)  
(A)  
(B)  
NOTE  
If a non-standard size original is loaded (including special sizes), the closest standard size may be displayed,  
or the original size may not appear at all.  
If "CANCEL DETECTION AT DOCUMENT GLASS" is enabled in the administrator settings (see page 11 of the  
administrator settings guide), automatic original detection at the document glass will not operate. In this case,  
follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size.  
Manually setting the scanning size  
4
If you load an original that is not a standard size (such as an INCH size), or if the size is not detected correctly, you  
must touch the [ORIGINAL] key and set the original size manually. Perform the following steps after placing the  
document in the automatic document feeder or on the document glass.  
If a non-standard size original is placed in  
1 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
the document feeder or on the document  
glass, touch the [SIZE INPUT] tab and then  
0
enter the X (width) and Y (length)  
dimensions of the original.  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
X
OK  
X is initially selected.  
Y
Enter the X dimension  
(64 432)  
(width) and then touch  
the Y( ) key and enter  
the Y dimension (length).  
X can be from 64 to 432  
mm, and Y can be from  
64 to 297 mm.  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
X
Y
420  
mm  
(64 297)  
mm  
297  
STANDARD SIZE  
SIZE INPUT  
2 Touch the desired original size key.  
OK  
[AUTO] is no longer  
highlighted. [MANUAL]  
and the original size key  
you  
highlighted.  
A5  
A4  
A4R  
B4  
If you frequently use originals that are the same  
non-standard size, you can store the size as  
ORIGINAL SIZES"on the following page. This will  
save you the trouble of manually entering the size  
each time you use that original size.  
A5R  
AB  
B5  
INCH  
touched  
are  
A3  
B5R  
STANDARD SIZE  
SIZE INPUT  
3 Touch the [OK] key.  
If you wish to select an INCH size, touch  
the [AB/INCH] key and then touch the  
desired original size key.  
You will return to the initial screen.  
The selected original size appears in the  
4
top half of the [ORIGINAL] key.  
[INCH] is highlighted  
OK  
1
1
1
/
/
/
2X  
8 13  
X
52 82  
0
and INCH size keys are  
displayed. To return to  
the AB palette, touch the  
[AB/INCH] key once  
again.  
1
1
1
/
/
/
X
52 82R  
X
82 14  
AB  
1
/
2
8 X11  
1
/
2X  
X
8
11  
1117  
INCH  
ORIGINAL  
1
/
X
82
STANDARD SIZE  
SIZE INPUT  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
STORING, DELETING, AND USING  
ORIGINAL SIZES  
Up to 9 special original sizes can be stored. Stored sizes can be easily called up and are not erased if the power is  
turned off. Storing a frequently used original size saves you the trouble of manually setting the size each time you  
copy that size of document.  
To cancel an original size storing, using, or deleting operation, touch the [ORIGINAL] key on the screen.  
Storing or deleting an original size  
Enter the X (width) and Y (length)  
1 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
5
dimensions of the original with the  
keys.  
0
X
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
CANCEL  
OK  
X
(width) is initially  
Y
selected.  
A
X
Y
(64 432)  
mm  
Enter X and then touch  
the ( ) key to enter Y.  
A width of 64 to 432 mm  
can be entered in X, and  
a length of 64 to 297 mm  
420  
297  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
(64 297)  
mm  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
2 Touch the [CUSTOM SIZE] key.  
can be entered in Y.  
AUTO  
AUTO  
AB  
EXPOSURE  
6 Touch the [OK] key.  
MANUAL  
INCH  
AUTO  
A4  
The original size entered in step 5 is stored in the  
key selected in step 4.  
PAPER SELE  
CUSTOM  
SIZE  
100%  
E INPUT  
COPY RATI  
To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
When you touch a key that shows an  
original size in step 4, a message screen  
appears that contains the keys [CANCEL],  
[DELETE], and [STORE].  
7
3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
AUTO  
To cancel the procedure, touch the [CANCEL]  
MANUA  
key.  
To delete the selected original size, touch the  
[DELETE] key.  
CUSTO  
SIZE  
LL  
STORE/DELETE  
To change the original size stored in the key,  
touch the [STORE] key. The screen of step 5  
will appear to let you change the size.  
Touch the original size key (  
you wish to store or delete.  
) that  
8 To exit, touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
4
To store an original size,  
touch a key that does not  
X68 Y78  
USING A STORED ORIGINAL SIZE  
show a size (  
).  
Follow steps 1 to 2 of "STORING OR  
DELETING AN ORIGINAL SIZE".  
1
Keys that already have  
an original size stored  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
will show the stored size  
Touch the original size key that you wish  
to use.  
2
X68 Y78  
(
).  
To delete or change a stored size, touch the key  
that shows the size that you wish to delete or  
change.  
X68 Y78  
If you are storing an original size, go to step 5.  
To delete or change an original size, go to  
step 7.  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
3 Touch the [OK] key.  
The stored original size is called up.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NORMAL COPYING  
This section describes the normal copying procedure.  
Making copies with the automatic document feeding  
function  
1-sided copies of 1-sided originals  
Original  
Copy  
Place the originals in the document feeder  
tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)  
1
2
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
0
OK  
4
Ensure that paper of the same size as the  
6
originals is automatically selected*.  
Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy  
mode is selected.  
AUTO  
The selected tray will be  
EXPOSURE  
highlighted  
or  
the  
The one-sided to one-  
A4  
ORIGINAL  
message "LOAD xxxxxx  
PAPER." will appear. If  
the message appears,  
load paper in a paper  
tray with paper of the  
required size.  
sided mode is selected  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
1
2
3
1
2
3
when no icon for a two-  
sided mode appears in  
the dashed area on the  
display. If the 1-sided to  
1-sided copy mode is  
A4  
1.  
2.  
B5  
5.  
A4  
100%  
A4  
3.  
4.  
B4  
A3  
already selected, steps 3 to 5 are not needed.  
Even if the message above appears, copying can  
be performed onto the currently selected paper.  
3 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.  
*The following requirements must be satisfied.  
Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,  
B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-  
1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2R")) are set and the  
auto paper select function is enabled.  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
If originals of a size other  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
than the sizes above are  
1. A4  
PLAIN  
2. B5  
PLAIN  
A4  
to be copied, manually  
select the desired paper  
size by touching the  
[PAPER SELECT] key  
and then touching the  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
5. A4  
PLAIN  
3. B4  
4. A3  
4 Touch the [1-sided to 1-sided copy] key.  
Touch the [1-sided to 1-  
sided copy] key.  
desired paper size selection key.  
The selected key will be highlighted and the paper  
selection screen will close. To close the paper  
selection screen without making a selection, touch  
the [PAPER SELECT] key.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NORMAL COPYING  
7 Select the desired output mode (page 4-9). 9 Press the [START] key.  
The sort mode is the  
default mode.  
To select the group  
If the [C] key is pressed  
while originals are being  
scanned, scanning will  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
mode,  
touch  
the  
stop. If copying had  
[OUTPUT] key, then  
touch the [GROUP] key  
on the output setting  
already started, copying  
and scanning will stop  
after the original in  
FILE  
screen, and then touch the [OK] key on the setting  
screen.  
progress is output to the original exit area. In these  
cases the copy quantity will be reset to "0".  
Use the numeric keys to set the desired  
number of copies.  
8
NOTES  
The 1-sided to 1-sided copying mode is set as the  
default in the initial settings. If the default setting  
has not been changed using the "Initial status  
settings" (administrator settings), steps 3 to 5 on  
page 4-7 can be omitted.  
Up to 999 can be set.  
If you are only making a  
single copy, the copy can  
be made with the copy  
number display showing  
"0". Use the [C] (clear)  
key to cancel an entry if  
a mistake has been made.  
LOGOUT  
To cancel copying...  
To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA]  
key. A confirmation message will appear. Touch  
the [YES] key to cancel copying.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NORMAL COPYING  
Copy output (sort and group)  
Example: Making five sets or five copies each of three originals  
Sorting copies into sets  
Original  
Five sets of copies  
OUTPUT  
SORT  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
GROUP  
LOGOUT  
Press the [START]  
key  
Touch the  
[OUTPUT] key  
Touch the  
[SORT] key  
Set the  
number of  
copies (5)  
When using the automatic document feeding function,  
sorting is automatically selected when the original is placed  
in the document feeder.  
Grouping copies by page  
Original  
4
5 copies per page  
OUTPUT  
SORT  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
GROUP  
LOGOUT  
Press the [START]  
key  
Touch the  
[OUTPUT] key  
Touch  
[GROUP] key  
the  
Set the  
number of  
copies (5)  
"Group" is automatically selected when the  
original is placed on the document glass.  
Selecting the output tray (when an optional finisher or saddle stitch finisher is  
installed)  
When the [FINISHER TRAY] key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the finisher tray of the finisher or  
saddle stitch finisher. When the "CENTRE TRAY" key is highlighted, output pages are delivered to the centre  
tray. Touch the appropriate key to select the desired output tray.  
0
OUTPUT  
SORT  
OK  
FINISHER  
TRAY  
CENTRE  
TRAY  
STAPLE  
SORT  
SADDLE  
STITCH  
PUNCH  
GROUP  
OFFSET  
This screen appears when a saddle stitch finisher is installed.  
The screen that appears when a finisher is installed is slightly different.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NORMAL COPYING  
Automatic two-sided copying using the automatic  
document feeding function  
The machine can automatically copy two-sided originals, saving you the trouble of manually turning over each  
original page.  
Original  
Copy  
1. Automatic two-sided copying from one-sided  
originals  
2. Automatic two-sided copying from two-sided  
originals  
3. Automatic one-sided copying from two-sided  
originals  
Place the originals in the document feeder  
tray. (pages 4-3 to 4-6)  
1
3 Select the desired copy mode.  
The display will vary  
ED COPY  
depending  
on  
the  
equipment installed.  
If a copy key is touched for a mode that cannot  
be selected, a double beep will sound.  
2 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.  
Example of a  
landscape-oriented  
original  
Example of a  
portrait-oriented  
original  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
When making automatic two-sided copies of a  
one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size  
portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top  
and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,  
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.  
4 Touch the [OK] key.  
0
OK  
BINDING  
Perform steps 6 through 9 on pages 4-7 and 4-8.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NORMAL COPYING  
Copying from the document glass  
When copying originals which cannot be fed from the automatic document feeder such as thick originals, open the  
document cover and copy the originals from the document glass.  
1-sided copies of 1-sided originals  
Original  
Copy  
Place the original on the document glass.  
Ensure that paper of the same size as the  
original is automatically selected*.  
1
3
AUTO  
The selected tray will be  
EXPOSURE  
highlighted  
or  
the  
message "LOAD xxxxxx  
PAPER." will appear. If  
the message appears,  
load paper in a paper  
tray with paper of the  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
4
100%  
COPY RATIO  
required size.  
Even if the message above is displayed, copying  
can be performed onto the currently selected  
paper.  
* The following requirements must be satisfied.  
Originals of a standard size (A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5,  
B5R or A5 (11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-  
1/2" x 11"R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)) are set and the  
auto paper select function is enabled.  
Document glass scale  
mark  
Document glass scale  
mark  
B5  
A4 or 8½x11  
B4 or  
8½x14  
B5  
If originals of a size other  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
A4 or 8½x11  
A3 or 11x17  
than the sizes above are  
to be copied, manually  
select the desired paper  
size by touching the  
[PAPER SELECT] key  
and then touching the  
1. A4  
PLAIN  
2. B5  
PLAIN  
A4  
Align the corner of the original with the tip of the  
arrow mark on the document glass scale.  
Place the original in the appropriate position for its  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
5. A4  
PLAIN  
3. B4  
4. A3  
size as shown above.  
desired paper size selection key.  
The selected key will be highlighted and the paper  
selection screen will close. To close the paper  
selection screen without making a selection, touch  
the [PAPER SELECT] key.  
Ensure that the 1-sided to 1-sided copy  
mode is selected.  
2
The one-sided to one-  
ORIGINAL  
A4  
sided mode is selected  
when no icon for a two-  
sided mode appears in  
the dashed area on the  
display. If an icon  
appears, perform steps  
2
2
2
1
1
1
A4  
1.  
A4  
3.  
4.  
2.  
B5  
B4  
A3  
5. A4  
3 to 5 on page 4-7 and then go to step 3.  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NORMAL COPYING  
Select the desired output mode. (page 4-  
4
6 Press the [START] key.  
Replace the original with  
Group mode is the  
default mode.  
the next original and  
press the [START] key.  
Repeat this operation  
until all originals have  
been scanned.  
2-SIDED COPY  
To select sort mode,  
touch the [OUTPUT]  
key, touch the [SORT]  
OUTPUT  
key in the screen that  
appears, and then touch  
the [OK] key.  
FILE  
If you selected "Sort" for  
the output mode in step 4 and pressed the  
[START] key, it is necessary to touch the [READ-  
END] key.  
Use the numeric keys to set the desired  
number of copies.  
5
7 Touch the [READ-END] key.  
Up to 999 can be set.  
If you are only making a  
single copy, the copy can  
be made with the copy  
number display showing  
"0".  
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
WHEN FINISHED, PRESS [READ-END].  
READ-END  
LOGOUT  
Use the [C] (clear) key to  
cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.  
To cancel copying...  
To cancel a copy job in progress, press the [CA] key.  
A confirmation message will appear. Touch the  
[YES] key to cancel copying.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NORMAL COPYING  
Automatic two-sided copying from the document glass  
The following two-sided copying function is possible. The copy paper is turned over automatically, allowing easy two-  
sided copying.  
Original  
Copy  
Place an original on the document glass.  
1
3 Touch the [1-sided to 2-sided copy] key.  
4
Example of a  
landscape-oriented  
original  
Example of a  
portrait-oriented  
original  
Document glass scale  
mark  
Document glass scale  
mark  
B5  
A4 or 8½x11  
B4 or  
8½x14  
B5  
A4 or 8½x11  
A3 or 11x17  
When making automatic two-sided copies of a  
one-sided A3 (11" x 17") or B4 (8-1/2" x 14") size  
portrait original, or when you wish to invert the top  
and bottom of the back side of a two-sided original,  
touch the [BINDING CHANGE] key.  
Align the corner of the original with the tip of the  
arrow mark on the document glass scale.  
Place the original in the appropriate position for its  
size as shown above.  
4 Touch the [OK] key.  
2 Touch the [2-SIDED COPY] key.  
0
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
BINDING  
Perform steps 3 to 7 on pages 4-11 and 4-12.  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ADJUSTING THE EXPOSURE  
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the original to be copied. The selections are AUTO, TEXT, TEXT/PHOTO  
and PHOTO.  
Automatic exposure adjustment  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
The default exposure  
setting is "AUTO", which  
automatically  
adjusts  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
the exposure for the  
original. To select the  
exposure mode, or to  
manually adjust the  
AUTO A4  
exposure level, follow the steps below.  
Selecting the exposure mode and manually adjusting the exposure level  
1 Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.  
3 Adjust the exposure level.  
Touch the  
make darker copies.  
Touch the key to  
make lighter copies.  
key to  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
5
ORIGINAL  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
1
3
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
NOTE  
Select [TEXT], [TEXT/PHOTO] or [PHOTO]  
as appropriate for the original to be  
Exposure levels in TEXT mode  
2
copied.  
1 to 2: Dark originals such as newspaper  
0
3:  
Normal density originals  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
ORIGINAL  
OK  
4 to 5: Originals written with pencils or light colour  
characters  
IMAGE TYPE  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
5
TEXT  
TEXT/PHOTO  
PHOTO  
EXPOSURE  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
1
3
100%  
COPY RATIO  
About the steps that follow  
To select [TEXT], touch the [AUTO MANUAL]  
key so that [MANUAL] is selected.  
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
13.  
Exposure modes selection  
TEXT:  
This mode is useful for producing  
dark text copies with minimum  
background.  
TEXT/PHOTO: This provides the best balance for  
copying an original which contains  
both text and photos. This mode is  
also useful for copying printed  
photographs.  
NOTES  
To return to the automatic exposure mode, touch  
the [AUTO / MANUAL] key to highlight [AUTO],  
and then touch the [OK] key.  
The exposure level used in automatic exposure  
mode can be adjusted in the administrator  
settings. See "Exposure adjustment" on page 16  
of the administrator settings guide.  
PHOTO:  
This mode provides the best copies  
of photographs with fine details.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  
Reduction and enlargement ratios can be selected automatically or manually.  
Automatic selection: Auto image (see below)  
Manual selection: Preset copy ratios/zoom (see page 4-16)  
Automatic selection (auto image)  
The reduction or enlargement ratio will be selected automatically based on the original size and the selected paper size.  
Place the original in the document feeder  
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3  
1
3 Touch the [AUTO IMAGE] key.  
5. A4  
The detected original size will be displayed.  
AUTO  
NOTE  
IMAGE  
Automatic ratio adjustment can only be used for the  
following original and paper sizes. It cannot be used  
for other sizes. However, in the case of non-standard  
original and paper sizes, the sizes can be entered to  
make automatic ratio adjustment possible for those  
sizes.  
The [AUTO IMAGE] key  
PAPER SELECT  
will be highlighted and  
the best reduction or  
enlargement ratio for the  
original size and the  
selected paper size will  
O
GE  
122%  
COPY RATIO  
Original sizes:Standard sizes (see "Original size  
detection function" on page 4-3.)  
be  
selected  
and  
Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R  
(11" x 17", 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-  
1/2" x 11"R, or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R)  
4
displayed in the copy ratio display.  
NOTE  
If the message "ROTATE ORIGINAL FROM  
TO  
" is displayed, change the orientation of the  
original as indicated in the message. When the  
message above is displayed, copying can be done  
without changing the orientation, but the image will  
not fit the paper correctly.  
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then  
select the desired paper size.  
2
The selected paper size  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
key is highlighted and  
the paper selection  
screen closes.  
1. A4  
PLAIN  
2. B5  
PLAIN  
A4  
PLAIN  
HEAVY PAPER  
PLAIN  
5. A4  
PLAIN  
3. A4  
4. A3  
Use the numeric keys to set the desired  
number of copies.  
4
Up to 999 can be set.  
If you are only making a  
single copy, the copy can  
be made with the copy  
number display showing  
"0".  
NOTE  
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,  
load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the  
size" on page 2-14.)  
LOGOUT  
Use the [C] (clear) key to  
cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.  
5 Press the [START] key.  
If you placed the original  
on the document glass,  
set the output mode to  
"Sort", and pressed the  
[START] key, you must  
touch the [READ-END]  
key after all pages of the  
original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)  
To cancel the auto image mode, touch the [CA] key.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  
Manual selection (preset copy ratios/zoom)  
Five preset enlargement and five preset reduction copy ratios (max. 400%, min. 25%) can be selected. In addition,  
the zoom keys can be used to select any ratio from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.  
<The administrator settings on page 16 of the administrator settings guide can be used to set two additional  
enlargement ratios and two additional reduction ratios.>  
Place the original in the document feeder  
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3  
Use the reduction, enlargement, and  
[ZOOM] keys on the touch panel to set the  
desired copy ratio.  
1
4
NOTE  
When the original is placed in the document feeder,  
the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.  
ZOOM  
2 Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.  
XY ZOOM  
MENU  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
Zoom ratios: Any ratio  
from 25% to 400% can  
be set in 1% increments.  
70  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
ZOOM  
Touch the [  
increase the ratio, or the  
] key to decrease  
] key to  
[
MENU  
XY ZOOM  
the ratio. (If you continue  
] key, the ratio will change  
automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will  
change rapidly.)  
Use the [MENU] key to select menu " " or  
menu " " for copy ratio selection.  
Menu  
3
to touch the [  
]/[  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
0
NOTES  
Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the  
approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to  
] key to decrease the  
AUTO  
OK  
ORIGINAL  
ZOOM  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
AUTO  
A4  
increase the ratio or the [  
ratio.  
PAPER SELECT  
AUTO  
IMAGE  
MENU  
XY ZOOM  
COPY RATIO  
Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key  
is continuously touched can be disabled in the  
administrator settings (see "Key operation setting  
(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the  
administrator settings guide).  
If the message "IMAGE IS LARGER THAN COPY  
PAPER." appears when a ratio is selected, the  
image may not fit on the copy paper.  
A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:  
70%, 81% and 86% (for the AB system).  
77% and 64% (for the inch system).  
B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:  
115%, 122% and 141% (for the AB system).  
121% and 129% (for the inch system).  
Menu  
To set the horizontal and vertical copy ratios  
separately, use the XY ZOOM feature. See page  
4-18.  
0
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
OK  
ZOOM  
AUTO  
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
EXPOSURE  
AUTO  
A4  
PAPER SELECT  
0
AUTO  
AUTO  
IMAGE  
XY ZOOM  
MENU  
OK  
COPY RATIO  
ORIGINAL  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
A.Preset reduction copy ratios are:  
50% and 25%.  
B.Preset enlargement copy ratios are:  
200% and 400%.  
AUTO  
A4  
PAPER SELECT  
AUTO  
IMAGE  
IO  
COPY RATIO  
(The custom ratios set by the administrator appear  
in ratio menu 2.)  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  
Make sure that an appropriate paper size  
has been selected based on the selected  
6
8 Press the [START] key.  
ratio.  
If you placed the original  
on the document glass,  
set the output to "Sort",  
ORIGINAL  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
A4  
and  
pressed  
the  
Auto paper select display  
B4  
AUTO  
[START] key, you must  
touch the [READ-END]  
key after all pages of the  
5. A4  
PAPER SELECT  
4
86%  
COPY RATIO  
original have been scanned. (Step 7 on page 4-12)  
To return the ratio to 100%  
NOTE  
To return the ratio setting to 100%, touch the [COPY  
RATIO] key to display the ratio menu and then touch  
the [100%] key. (Steps 2 and 3 on page 4-16.)  
If the auto paper select display does not appear, a  
tray with the correct size of paper for the selected  
ratio will not be automatically selected.  
Use the numeric keys to set the desired  
number of copies.  
7
Up to 999 can be set.  
If you are only making a  
single copy, the copy can  
be made with the copy  
number display showing  
"0".  
4
LOGOUT  
Use the [C] (clear) key to  
cancel an entry if a mistake has been made.  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  
XY ZOOM  
The XY ZOOM feature allows the horizontal and vertical copy ratios to be changed separately. The ratios can be set  
from 25% to 400% in increments of 1%.  
Example: Selecting 100% for the length and 50% for the width  
Copy  
Original  
Place the original in the document feeder  
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3  
Use the reduction, enlargement, and  
1
5
ZOOM ([  
], [  
]) keys to change the  
copy ratio in the horizontal (X) direction.  
Y 10 A fixed ratio key will not  
64%  
NOTE  
become  
highlighted  
ZOOM  
When the original is placed in the document feeder,  
the ratio can be set from 25% to 200%.  
when touched.  
50%  
2 Touch the [COPY RATIO] key.  
XY ZOOM  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
Zoom ratios: Any ratio  
from 25% to 400% can  
be set in 1% increments.  
50  
X
100%  
COPY RATIO  
Y
100  
Touch the [  
increase the ratio, or the  
] key to decrease  
] key to  
ZOOM  
[
the ratio. (If you continue  
] key, the ratio will change  
automatically. After 3 seconds, the ratio will  
change rapidly.)  
to touch the [  
]/[  
3 Touch the [XY ZOOM] key.  
NOTES  
Touch a reduction or enlargement key to set the  
approximate ratio, then touch the [ ] key to  
] key to decrease the  
MENU  
XY ZOOM  
increase the ratio or the [  
ratio.  
Automatic changing of the ratio when a zoom key  
is continuously touched can be disabled in the  
administrator settings (see "Key operation setting  
(prohibit key repeat)" on page 10 of the  
administrator settings guide).  
4 Touch the [X] key.  
The initial state of the [X]  
key is selected  
100  
100  
X
Y
(highlighted), so this  
step normally is not  
necessary. Touch the [X]  
key only if it is not  
highlighted yet.  
6 Touch the [Y] key.  
ZOOM  
50  
X
Y 100  
OM  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
REDUCTION/ENLARGEMENT/ZOOM  
Use the reduction, enlargement, and  
Select any desired copy settings such as  
the exposure or number of copies, and  
then press the [START] key.  
7
10  
ZOOM ([  
], [  
]) keys to change the  
copy ratio in the vertical (Y) direction.  
A fixed ratio key will not  
70%  
become  
highlighted  
X
Y
50  
70  
when touched.  
64%  
50%  
ZOOM  
50  
70  
The zoom keys can be  
used to change the ratio  
from 25% to 400% in  
increments of 1%.  
Y
ZOOM  
To cancel an X or Y zoom setting...  
Touch the [XY ZOOM] key or the [CANCEL] key in  
the ratio selection screen (step 3 or 5 on page 4-18).  
If needed, you can touch  
the [X] key once again to  
readjust the X zoom.  
XY ZOOM  
CANCEL  
8 Touch the [OK] key.  
OK  
141%  
4
200%  
100%  
A
PA  
400%  
If needed, touch the [PAPER SELECT] key  
and select the paper size.  
9
0
If the AUTO PAPER  
SELECT mode is on, the  
appropriate copy paper  
size will have been  
automatically selected  
based on the original  
size and selected copy  
ratios.  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
A4  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
N
PLAIN  
APER  
5. A4  
PLAIN  
PAPER SELECT  
N
X-50% Y-
COPY RAT
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL PAPERS  
Special papers including transparency film, postcards and tabbed paper must be fed through the bypass tray.  
Place the original in the document feeder  
tray or on the document glass. (pages 4-3  
1
5 Select the bypass tray.  
0
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
A4  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
N
HEAVY PAPER  
PAPER  
N
5. A4  
PLAIN  
PAPER SELECT  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
Select any desired copy settings such as  
the exposure or number of copies, and  
then press the [START] key.  
6
2 Load the special paper in the bypass tray.  
See page 2-12 for the  
specifications of paper  
that can be used in the  
bypass tray.  
When copying from the  
document glass in the  
sort mode using the  
[START] key, touch the  
[READ-END] key after  
all originals have been  
scanned (step 7 on page  
4-12).  
For the paper loading  
instructions,  
see  
10).  
3 Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key.  
AUTO  
4
EXPOSURE  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
100%  
Set the type and size of paper loaded in the  
4
bypass tray.  
0
1
The (X) key shows the  
AUTO  
currently  
paper type.  
selected  
ORIGINAL  
A4  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
N
HEAVY PAPER  
APER  
5. A4  
PLAIN  
PAPER SELECT  
2
The (Y) key shows the  
size of paper loaded  
in the bypass tray.  
N
100%  
COPY RATIO  
(X)  
(Y)  
3
To change the displayed paper type, touch the  
(X) key before touching the (Y) key. When  
loading paper, if you changed the paper size  
from an AB size to an inch size (or from an inch  
size to an AB size), or if you changed the paper  
type, be sure to change the paper type and size  
settings as explained in steps 5 to 7 on page 2-  
14, and steps 8 to 10 on page 2-15.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CHAPTER 5  
CONVENIENT COPY  
FUNCTIONS  
This chapter explains special-purpose functions, storing of copy  
settings, and other convenient functions. Please select and read  
sections of this chapter as needed.  
Page  
SPECIAL MODES................................................................................... 5-2  
Margin shift...................................................................................... 5-3  
Erase............................................................................................... 5-4  
Dual page copy ............................................................................... 5-5  
Pamphlet copy................................................................................. 5-6  
Job build.......................................................................................... 5-8  
Tandem copy................................................................................... 5-10  
Covers/inserts ................................................................................. 5-12  
Transparency film with insert sheets............................................... 5-23  
Multi shot......................................................................................... 5-24  
Book copy ....................................................................................... 5-26  
Tab copy.......................................................................................... 5-27  
Card shot......................................................................................... 5-29  
Mirror image.................................................................................... 5-31  
B/W reverse..................................................................................... 5-31  
Print menu....................................................................................... 5-32  
STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS......................... 5-44  
Storing a job program...................................................................... 5-44  
Calling up a job program................................................................. 5-45  
Deleting a stored job program......................................................... 5-45  
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN.............................................................. 5-46  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main screen of copy mode to open the special modes screen. The following  
functions can be selected in the special modes screen.  
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]  
key in the main screen.  
READY O SCAN FOR COPY.  
0
OK  
1/3  
SPECIAL MODES  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
ORIGINAL A4  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
MARGIN SHIFT  
ERASE  
A4  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
1.  
A4  
3.  
2.  
JOB  
BUILD  
TANDEM  
COPY  
A4  
B5  
PAMPHLET COPY  
FILE  
B4  
A3  
100%  
4.  
QUICK FILE  
COPY RATIO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Margin shift (page 5-3)  
Erase (page 5-4)  
[OK] key on the special modes screen  
Touch the [OK] key to return to the main screen of  
copy mode.  
Dual page copy (page 5-5)  
Pamphlet copy (page 5-6)  
Job build (page 5-8)  
/
key  
Touch these keys to change the special modes  
screen.  
Tandem copy (page 5-10)  
There are three special modes screens.  
Touch the key to change to the other two screens.  
The following special functions can be selected in the 2nd screen (2/3).  
Covers/inserts (page 5-12)  
Transparency inserts (page 5-23)  
Multi shot (page 5-24)  
Book copy (page 5-26)  
Tab copy (page 5-27)  
Card shot (page 5-29)  
The following special functions can be selected in the 3rd screen (3/3).  
Mirror image (page 5-31)  
Print menu (page 5-32)  
B/W reverse (page 5-31)  
General procedure for using special functions  
To select a special function in one of the other two  
1 Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.  
screens, use the  
screen.  
/
keys to change the  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
Setting procedures for modes requiring setting  
screens start on the next page.  
The dual page copy, job build, tandem copy,  
mirror image and B/W reverse functions do not  
require setting screens.  
Touch the key for the desired special  
2
mode.  
Example:  
SPECIAL MODES  
Selecting the margin  
shift function  
MARGIN SHIFT  
PAMPHLET COPY  
ERASE  
JOB  
BUILD  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SPECIAL MODES  
Margin shift  
The margin shift function will automatically shift the text or image on the copy paper approximately 10 mm (1/2") in  
its initial setting.  
This function is convenient when stapling or binding copies with a string.  
NOTE  
The initial setting for the margin width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm  
(0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide).  
The shift direction can be selected from right or left  
shift as shown in the illustration.  
One-sided copying  
Image shifted  
to the right  
Image shifted  
to the left  
Original  
Margin  
Margin  
Two-sided copying  
Original  
Image shifted  
to the right  
Image shifted  
to the left  
Or  
5
Margin  
Margin  
Set the shift amount as needed and touch  
the [OK] key.  
3
To display the special modes screen...  
Use the  
keys to set the shift  
amount. The shift  
amount can be set from  
0 to 20 mm in 1 mm (0"  
to 1" in 1/8") increments.  
and the  
OK  
CANCEL  
OK  
SIDE 1  
SIDE
Touch the [MARGIN SHIFT] key on the  
special modes screen.  
1
(0 20)  
)  
10  
10  
mm  
mm  
The margin shift setting  
SPECIAL MODES  
screen will appear.  
The margin shift icon  
MARGIN SHIFT  
ERASE  
(
) will also appear in  
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
4
JOB  
BUILD  
the upper left of the  
screen to indicate that  
the function is turned on.  
PAMPHLET COPY  
About the steps that follow  
2 Select the shift direction.  
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
Touch a shift direction  
key to select right or left.  
The selected key will be  
highlighted.  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
To cancel the margin shift function, touch the  
[CANCEL] key on the margin shift setting screen  
(step 3).  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Erase  
The erase function is used to erase the shadow lines on copies produced when copying thick originals or books. The  
erase modes that can be selected are shown below. The erase width is approximately 10 mm (1/2") in it's initial  
setting.  
NOTE  
The initial setting for the erasure width can be changed in the administrator settings to any value from 0 to 20 mm  
(0" to 1") (page 16 of the administrator settings guide).  
Original  
Copy  
EDGE ERASE  
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of  
copies caused when heavy paper or a book is used  
as an original.  
CENTRE ERASE  
Eliminates shadow lines produced by the bindings  
of bound documents.  
EDGE + CENTRE ERASE  
Eliminates shadow lines around the edges of copies  
and eliminates the shadow at the centre of copies.  
Adjust the amount of erase and touch the  
[OK] key.  
To display the special modes screen...  
3
4
Use the  
and  
keys  
CANCEL  
EDGE  
OK  
to set the erase width to  
any value from 0 to 10  
mm in increments of  
1 mm (0" to 1" in 1/8").  
Touch the [ERASE] key on the special  
modes screen.  
(0 20)  
mm  
1
10  
The erase setting screen  
MODES  
will appear.  
DUAL  
C
RGIN SHIFT  
PHLET COPY  
ERASE  
The erase icon ( ) will  
also appear in the upper  
left of the screen to  
indicate that the function  
is turned on.  
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
BUILD  
TAN  
C
About the steps that follow  
2 Select the desired erase mode.  
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
Select one of the three  
erase modes. The  
ERASE  
EDGE  
ERASE  
CENTRE  
ERASE  
EDGE+CENTRE  
ERASE  
selected key will be  
highlighted.  
NOTE  
When erase is used, edge erase takes place at the  
edges of the original image. If you also use a ratio  
setting, the edge erase width will change according  
to the set ratio.  
To cancel the erase function, touch the [CANCEL]  
key on the erase setting screen (step 3).  
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Dual page copy  
The dual page copy function produces separate copies of two documents placed side by side on the document glass.  
This function is especially useful when copying books and other bound documents.  
[Example] Copying right and left pages of a book  
Book original  
Dual page copy  
The dual page copy function can be used only  
when copying from the document glass. The  
automatic document feeder cannot be used with  
this function.  
Only 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) paper can be used.  
Ensure that A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size paper is  
selected.  
To display the special modes screen...  
4
If A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size  
paper is not selected,  
AUTO A4  
PAPER SELECT  
touch  
the  
[PAPER  
Touch the [DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the  
special modes screen.  
SELECT] key to select  
A4 (8-1/2" x 11") size  
paper.  
1
OK  
The  
[DUAL  
PAGE  
100%  
COPY] key will be  
highlighted to indicate  
that the function is  
turned on, and the dual  
1/3  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
RASE  
JOB  
NDEM  
COPY  
BUILD  
About the steps that follow  
page copy icon (  
) will  
For two-sided copying, follow steps 2 through 4  
on page 4-13 and then follow steps 4 through 6  
on page 4-12.  
5
appear in the upper left  
of the screen.  
For one-sided copying, follow steps 4 through 6  
on page 4-12.  
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
2
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
NOTE  
3 Place the originals on the document glass.  
To erase shadows caused by document binding, use  
the edge erase function (page 5-4). (Centre Erase  
and Edge + Centre Erase cannot be used in  
combination.)  
When copying a thick  
book, press down lightly  
on the book to flatten it  
against the document  
glass.  
To cancel the dual page copy function, touch the  
[DUAL PAGE COPY] key on the special modes  
screen (screen of step 1).  
1
/
Index  
A4  
8
2" x 11"  
This page  
is copied  
first.  
Centre line of  
original  
B4  
1
/
B5  
A4(8 " x 11")  
(8 " x 14")  
2
1
/
A3 (11" x 17")  
2
Place the opened original on the document glass so  
that the first page you wish to copy is on the right and  
the centre of the original is aligned with the size mark.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Pamphlet copy  
The pamphlet copy function is used to arrange copies in proper order for eventual centre-stapling and folding into a  
booklet. Two original pages are copied onto each side of copy paper. Four pages are, therefore, copied onto one sheet.  
This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet.  
NOTE  
To make pamphlet copies of a book or other bound original, use the book copy function (page 5-26). The book copy  
function scans the opened original in two-page units. (Two pages are scanned at each scan, reducing the number  
of repetitions of the scanning operation by a half.)  
[Example] Copying eight originals in the pamphlet copy mode  
Scan the originals from the first page to the last  
Originals  
(one-sided)  
Finished copies are  
folded in two.  
page. The order of copying will be automatically  
adjusted by the machine.  
Either left binding (right to left turning) or right  
binding (left to right turning) can be selected.  
Left binding  
1
2
3
4
5
Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.  
Blank pages may be automatically produced at  
the end depending on the number of the originals.  
6
First page  
7
8
If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, copies can  
be stapled in two positions along the centre of  
copies and folded at the centre.  
Originals  
(two-sided)  
2
4
6
8
Right binding  
1
3
First page  
5
7
Select the binding position (left binding or  
right binding).  
To display the special modes screen...  
3
LEFT  
RIGHT  
BINDING  
BINDING  
C
SE  
Touch the [PAMPHLET COPY] key on the  
special modes screen.  
1
SPECIAL MODES  
The PAMPHLET COPY  
setting screen will  
MARGIN SHIFT  
ERASE  
appear. The pamphlet  
copy icon ( , etc.) will  
also appear in the upper  
left corner of the screen  
to indicate that the  
function is turned on.  
JOB  
BUILD  
PAMPHLET COPY  
If you wish to insert a different type of paper for use as  
a cover, follow steps 4 through 12 below.  
If you do not wish to insert paper for a cover, continue  
from step 8 on the next page.  
4 Touch the [COVER SETTING] key.  
Designate the type of originals to be  
copied: 1-sided or 2-sided.  
2
CANCEL  
OK  
Select the [2-SIDED] key  
if you wish to scan a two-  
RIGHT  
ORIGINAL  
NG  
BINDING  
1-SIDED  
2-SIDED  
sided original using the  
automatic document  
feeding function.  
COVER  
SETTING  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SPECIAL MODES  
Select whether or not you wish to copy on  
the cover ("YES" or "NO").  
PRINT ON COVER  
Place the original in the document feeder  
or on the document glass. (page 4-3)  
5
9
Ensure that the desired paper size has  
been automatically selected based on the  
original size.  
10  
YES  
NO  
To select another size  
paper, select the desired  
size and touch the  
[AUTO IMAGE] key. The  
appropriate copy ratio  
AUTO A3  
PAPER SELECT  
6 Select the paper tray for the cover.  
will  
be  
selected  
100%  
1
The currently selected  
paper tray for the  
cover is displayed.  
CANCEL  
OK  
automatically based on  
the original size and the paper size. (See steps 2  
and 3 on page 4-15.)  
PAPER TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
2
The size and type of  
paper in the currently  
Select any desired copy settings such as  
the exposure or number of copies, and  
then press the [START] key.  
A4  
11  
12  
PLAIN  
selected  
tray  
is  
displayed.  
In the example screen above, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")  
size plain paper is loaded.  
To change the paper tray for the cover, touch the  
tray selection key. (In the screen example, the  
"BYPASS TRAY" display is the tray selection key.)  
[When using the automatic document  
feeder:]  
Copying will start after all originals have been  
scanned. (The next step is not needed.)  
The tray selection screen appears when the tray  
selection key is touched. Select the desired tray in  
this screen.  
[When using the document glass:]  
Replace the original with the next original and  
press the [START] key. Repeat this operation until  
all originals have been scanned and then touch  
the [READ-END] key.  
5
NOTES  
When the cover paper is fed from the inserter, the  
cover cannot be copied on.  
NOTES  
Two-sided copying is not possible on label sheets,  
transparency film, and tabbed paper. When  
copying on a cover, do not select a tray that has  
one of these types of paper.  
When the pamphlet copy function is set, the two-  
sided copying mode will be automatically selected.  
If this function is used in combination with the  
pamphlet copy function (pamphlet stapling) and  
the number of origial pages exceeds the number  
of pages that can be stapled, a message asking  
you to select "CANCEL", "CONTINUE", or  
"DIVIDE" will appear.  
7 Touch the [OK] key.  
CANCEL  
OK  
To cancel the job, select "CANCEL". To make  
pamphlet copies without stapling, select  
"CONTINUE". To divide the pages into sets that  
can be stapled, select "DIVIDE".  
RIGHT  
BINDING  
G
COVER  
SETTING  
If you performed steps 4 to 6 to insert cover paper,  
divided stapling is not possible. You can either  
continue pamphlet copying without stapling, or  
cancel the job.  
8 Touch the [OK] key.  
Return to the main  
screen of copy mode.  
OK  
To cancel the pamphlet copy function, touch the  
[CANCEL] key on the pamphlet copy setting screen  
(step 2).  
CANCEL  
RIGHT  
LEFT  
BINDING  
BINDING  
COVER  
SETTING  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Job build  
Use job build mode when you need to copy more original pages than can be loaded at once in the document feeder  
(the maximum number of pages that can be loaded is 150). This function allows the original pages to be scanned in  
sets.  
[Example] Copying 300 pages of A4 originals  
Originals  
1
151  
1
A:150 sheets B:150 sheets  
300 original pages  
*Divide the originals into sets of 150 pages each.  
Scan the originals starting from the first page of set  
A. Scan set B next, taking care to keep the correct  
page order.  
Make sure that the desired paper size is  
selected, select the number of copies or  
other copy settings, and press the  
[START] key.  
4
To display the special modes screen...  
Scanning of originals will  
start. After scanning of  
the first set of originals (A  
in the example above) is  
completed, remove the  
Touch the [JOB BUILD] key on the special  
modes screen.  
1
ES  
The [JOB BUILD] key  
will be highlighted to  
indicate that the function  
is turned on, and the job  
DUAL  
COP  
N SHIFT  
ERASE  
scanned originals, place  
the next set of originals  
JOB  
BUILD  
TANDE  
COPY  
LET COPY  
build icon  
(
)
will  
(set B in the example) and press the [START] key.  
Repeat this operation until all sets of originals have  
been scanned.  
appear in the upper left  
of the screen.  
If you wish to adjust the copy settings each time  
you place a set of originals, see "Changing the  
copy settings for each set of originals" on the next  
page.  
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
2
Return to the main  
screen of copy mode.  
OK  
5 Touch the [READ-END] key.  
1/3  
DUAL PAGE  
RASE  
INTERRUPT  
COPY  
ES  
A4  
ORIGINAL  
TANDEM  
COPY  
JOB  
BUILD  
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,  
PRESS [CHANGE].  
CHANGE  
4.  
READ-END  
A3  
Place the first set of originals in the  
document feeder tray. (page 4-3)  
C
3
To cancel the job build function, touch the [JOB  
BUILD] key on the special modes screen (step 1).  
The highlighted display will be cancelled.  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SPECIAL MODES  
Changing the copy settings for each set of originals  
When using job build mode, you can change the copy settings each time you place a set of originals.  
After performing step 4 on page 5-8, follow the steps below.  
5 Touch the [CHANGE] key.  
7 Touch the [READ-END] key.  
INTERRUPT  
INTERRUPT  
ES  
A4  
ES  
A4  
ORIGINAL  
ORIGINAL  
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,  
PRESS [CHANGE].  
PLACE NEXT ORIGINAL. PRESS [START].  
TO CHANGE COPY SETTINGS,  
PRESS [CHANGE].  
CHANGE  
.  
READ-END  
CHANGE  
4.  
READ-END  
A3  
A3  
C
C
Select the desired copy settings in the  
screen that appears and press the  
[START] key.  
6
INTERRUPT  
[START].  
The copy settings that  
can be selected are  
"EXPOSURE", "PAPER  
SELECT", and "COPY  
RATIO".  
ORIGINAL A4  
READ-END  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
A4  
AUTO  
PAPER SELECT  
A4  
1.  
A4  
3. B4  
4. A3  
2.  
B5  
A4  
5.  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
If you touch the [READ-  
END] key now, copying  
will  
begin  
without  
scanning the new set of  
originals.  
5
NOTES  
If the original size was set manually at the beginning of the job build procedure, it will not be possible to change  
the original size setting. If the automatic original detection function is operating, the original size will be detected  
for each set of originals placed.  
When the bypass tray is selected, it is not possible to change the paper type.  
If "XY ZOOM" was initially set for the ratio, it will not be possible to change the ratio setting.  
When job build mode is used in combination with any of the following functions, the [CHANGE] key will not  
appear in the screen of step 5.  
Pamphlet copy, tandem copy, covers/inserts, transparency inserts, multi-shot, book copy, tab copy, staple sort,  
saddle stitch  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Tandem copy  
Two machines connected to the same network can be used to run a large copy job in parallel.  
By dividing the job in half, approximately half the time is required to complete the job.  
To use this function, two machines must be connected to your network as network printers. Even if more machines  
are connected to the network, this function can only be used to have one other machine share a job.  
Server machine and client machine  
In the following explanations, the machine on which  
the copy job is initially set up and tandem copy  
selected is called the server machine. The other  
machine that is asked to share the job is called the  
client machine.  
To use the tandem copy function, the tandem  
settings must be configured in the administrator  
settings. (See page 14 of the "Administrator settings  
100 sets of  
copies  
50 sets of  
copies  
50 sets of  
copies  
guide")  
When configuring the tandem settings in the server  
machine, the IP address of the client machine must  
be entered. For the port number, it is best to use the  
initial setting (50001). Unless you experience  
difficulty with this setting, do not change it. The  
tandem settings should be configured by your  
network administrator. If the server and client  
machines will alternate server and client roles, the IP  
address of the server machine must also be entered  
in the client machine.The same port number can be  
set in both machines.  
Set the number of copies with the numeric  
keys.  
3
To display the special modes screen...  
Up to 999 copies can be  
set. When the [START]  
key is pressed, the  
copies will automatically  
be divided between the  
Touch the [TANDEM COPY] key on the  
1
special modes screen.  
OK  
server  
machines. If an odd  
and  
client  
The [TANDEM COPY]  
key will be highlighted to  
LOGOUT  
1/3  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
ERASE  
number of copies is set, the server machine will  
make the extra set.  
indicate that the function  
is turned on, and the  
TANDEM  
COPY  
JOB  
BUILD  
tandem copy icon (  
)
will appear in the upper  
left of the screen.  
If an incorrect number of copies is set...  
Press the clear key and set the correct number of  
copies.  
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
2
Place the original in the document feeder  
You will return to the  
main screen of copy  
mode.  
4
OK  
or on the document glass. (page 4-3)  
1/3  
DUAL PAGE  
COPY  
RASE  
JOB  
BUILD  
TANDEM  
COPY  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
5 Press the [START] key.  
To cancel the tandem copy function, touch the  
[TANDEM COPY] key on the special modes screen  
(step 1). The highlighted display will be cancelled.  
NOTES  
To perform tandem copying, the server machine  
and client machine must meet certain conditions.  
After the [START] key is pressed on the server  
machine, the server machine verifies that the  
conditions have been met. If the conditions have  
not been met, tandem copying does not begin  
and "TANDEM OUTPUT IS NOT ALLOWED.  
OUTPUT ALL SETS USING MASTER  
MACHINE?" appears in the display. To have the  
server machine make all the copies, touch the  
[OK] key. To cancel the job, touch the [CANCEL]  
key.  
• As an example, the following conditions must  
be met when a staple finisher is installed on the  
server machine and not on the client machine:  
(1) If tandem copying is executed for a two-  
sided copy job with the number of copies  
set to 999 and "Non-staple" is selected,  
tandem copying will take place.  
5
(2) If tandem copying is executed for a two-  
sided copy job with the number of copies  
set to 999 and "Staple" is selected,  
tandem copying will not take place  
because the client machine does not have  
a finisher.  
After the [START] key is pressed, if the client  
machine cannot print because it is out of paper or  
other reason, the server machine will print its half  
of the job. The other half of the job will be stored in  
the client machine and the job will be printed when  
the client machine is able to print.  
If auditing mode is enabled on both the server and  
client machines, the same account number must  
be entered on both machines.  
If auditing mode is enabled on the client machine  
but not on the server machine, tandem copying  
cannot be performed.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Covers/inserts  
A different type of paper can be inserted in positions corresponding to front and back covers of a copy job when the  
automatic document feeding function is used. A different type of paper can also be automatically added as an insert  
at specified pages.  
As an example, tabbed paper can be added as inserts at the beginning of chapters or at other pages to create an  
indexed document.  
Covers/inserts can be disabled in the administrator settings (page 11 of the administrator settings guide).  
Example of adding covers  
Example of adding inserts  
Originals  
Originals  
Back cover  
Front cover  
Inserts  
Example of adding covers and inserts  
Originals  
About the explanations of covers and  
inserts  
There are various ways of using covers and inserts.  
To keep the explanations simple, covers and inserts  
are explained separately. The procedure for  
inserting covers is explained on page 5-13. The  
procedure for adding inserts is explained on page 5-  
14. After reading these explanations, see the  
examples of using covers and inserts on pages 5-  
17 to 5-22.  
Back  
cover  
Front  
cover  
Inserts  
Preparations for using covers and inserts  
Load the cover/insert paper in the tray before using the cover/insert function.  
Use the same size of paper for the covers/inserts as for the copies. (For the procedures for loading paper, see  
Before selecting the cover/insert function, place the originals in the document feeder, select one-sided or two-  
sided copying, and select the number of copies and any other desired copy settings as explained on pages 4-  
7 to 4-10. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts on the  
following page.  
The original must be scanned from the document feeder. The document glass cannot be used.  
Tabbed paper can be used for cover/ inserts, however, two-sided copying cannot be performed on the tabbed  
paper. Tabbed paper can be fed from the bypass tray, tray 3, and the inserter. The other trays cannot be used.  
Up to 100 covers/inserts can be inserted. Two covers/inserts cannot be inserted between the same pages.  
Pamphlet copying cannot be used in combination with covers/inserts.  
When performing two-sided copying of two-sided originals, an insert cannot be added between the front and  
back sides of an original page.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Procedure for inserting front and back cover paper  
The paper for the front cover is called the front cover paper ("FRONT COVER" in the touch panel). The paper  
for the back cover is called the back cover paper ("BACK COVER" in the touch panel).  
Examples of insertion methods for the front and back cover paper are given on pages 5-18 to 5-21.  
Set the insertion conditions for the front  
5
To display the special modes screen...  
cover paper.  
PLEASE SET UP A FRONT COVER.  
0
CANCEL  
OK  
FRONT COVER SETTING  
PRINT ON FRONT COVER  
PAPER TRAY  
Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the  
special modes screen (2nd screen).  
1
BYPASS  
TRAY  
1-SIDED  
2-SIDED  
YES  
NO  
A4  
PLAIN  
SPECIAL MODES  
TRANSPARENCY  
INSERTS  
COVERS/INSERTS  
(Y)  
(Z)  
(X)  
1
2
Select whether or not the front cover paper is to be  
copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]).  
Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided  
copying is to be performed on the front cover  
paper with the (Y) keys. This selection is only  
possible when the [YES] key of (X) has been  
selected. (The one-sided/two-sided selection  
made here only applies to the front cover paper.  
When the back cover paper is selected, the  
selection only applies to the back cover paper.)  
The (Z) key shows the tray selected for the front  
cover paper in step 3 and the paper size and  
type.  
BOOK COPY  
TAB COPY  
2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.  
CANCEL  
OK  
COVERS/INSERTS  
INSERTION  
TYPE A SETTING  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
FRONT COVER  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
TYPE B SETTING  
PAGE LAYOUT  
BACK COVER  
3
5
Select the tray used for the front cover  
paper.  
3
Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.  
You will return to the screen of step 2.  
When you return to the screen of step 2, the  
[FRONT COVER] key will be highlighted.  
OK  
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS  
6
7
INSERTION  
TYPE A  
INSERTION  
TYPE B  
FRONT COVER  
BACK COVER  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
To insert back cover paper, repeat steps 2  
through 6, using the [BACK COVER] key  
instead of the [FRONT COVER] key.  
(X)  
(Y)  
1
The tray name (tray position) selected for the  
front cover paper and the paper size and type  
are shown in (X). If the tray in which you  
loaded paper for the front cover is shown, touch  
the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step  
2.  
If the correct tray for the cover sheet paper does  
not appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray  
selection screen will appear. Select the tray in  
which you loaded paper for the front cover. You  
will return to the screen of above.  
PLEASE SET UP COVERS/INSERTS.  
0
OK  
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
COVERS/INSERTS  
FRONT COVER  
CANCEL  
INSERTION  
TYPE A SETTINGS  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
BACK COVER  
PAGE LAYOUT  
TYPE B SETTINGS  
2
Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the  
screen of step 7 to display a list of the  
selected settings (page 5-16).  
To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow  
steps 1 and 2 on page 5-16. To exit the  
cover/insert settings, touch the upper  
[OK] key in the screen of step 7.  
8
Touch the [FRONT COVER] key in the  
screen of step 2.  
4
9 Press the [START] key.  
To cancel covers/inserts settings...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SPECIAL MODES  
Procedure for adding inserts  
You can have different paper automatically inserted as an insert at a specified pages. Two types of insert paper  
can be used. These are specified with the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key and [INSERTION TYPE B  
SETTING] in the touch panel. Tabbed paper can be used as an insert.  
Examples of insertion methods for insert paper are given on page 5-22.  
Set the insertion conditions for insertion  
5
To display the special modes screen...  
type A .  
CANCEL  
OK  
INSERTION TYPE A SETTING  
1-SIDED  
2-SIDED  
PAPER TRAY  
PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
YES  
NO  
Touch the [COVERS/INSERTS] key in the  
special modes screen (2nd screen).  
A4  
1
TAB COPY  
PLAIN  
SPECIAL MODES  
(Y)  
(Z)  
(X)  
TRANSPARENCY  
INSERTS  
COVERS/INSERTS  
1
2
Select whether or not insertion type A paper is  
to be copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or  
[NO]).  
BOOK COPY  
TAB COPY  
Select whether one-sided copying or two-sided  
copying is to be performed on insertion type A  
with the (Y) keys. This selection is only possible  
when the [YES] key of (X) has been selected.  
(The one-sided/two-sided selection made here  
only applies to insertion type A paper. When  
insertion type B is selected, the selection only  
applies to insertion type B paper.)  
The (Z) key shows the tray selected for insertion  
type A in step 3 and the paper size and type.  
If a paper tray with tabbed paper is selected in the  
screen of step 3, you can touch the [TAB COPY]  
key. This allows you to select the tab width. Two-  
sided copying is not possible on tabbed paper.  
2 Touch the [PAPER TRAY SETTINGS] key.  
CANCEL  
OK  
COVERS/INSERTS  
INSERTION  
TYPE A SETTING  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
FRONT COVER  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
3
4
INSERTION  
TYPE B SETTING  
PAGE LAYOUT  
BACK COVER  
3 Select the tray used for insertion type A.  
OK  
PAPER TRAY SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
TYPE A  
INSERTION  
TYPE B  
Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 5.  
You will return to the screen of step 2.  
When you return to the screen of step 2, the  
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be  
highlighted.  
FRONT COVER  
BACK COVER  
6
7
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
A4  
A4  
A4  
A4  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
(X)  
(Y)  
If you wish to insert a different paper with  
the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,  
repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the  
[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead  
of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,  
and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead  
of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.  
1
2
The tray name (tray position) selected for  
insertion type A and the paper size and type are  
shown in (X). If the tray in which you loaded  
paper for insertion type A is shown, touch the  
[OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 2.  
If the correct tray for insertion type A does not  
appear in (X), touch the (Y) key. The tray  
selection screen will appear. Select the tray in  
which you loaded paper for insertion type A. You  
will return to the screen of step 2.  
OK  
OK  
CANCEL  
TS  
INSERTION  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
TYPE A SETTING  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
PAGE LAYOUT  
TYPE B SETTING  
Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]  
key in the screen of step 2  
4
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Touch the [INSERTION SETTINGS] key to  
specify the pages where you wish to insert  
the insert papers of [INSERTION TYPE A  
If you wish to insert a different paper with  
the [INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key,  
repeat steps 2 through 6. Use the  
[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] key instead  
of the [INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key,  
and the [INSERTION TYPE B] key instead  
of the [INSERTION TYPE A] key.  
8
11  
12  
SETTING] and [INSERTION TYPE  
B
SETTING].  
CANCE  
RTION  
SETTING  
OK  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
OK  
CANCEL  
TS  
TION  
INSERTION  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
SETTING  
TYPE A SETTING  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
PAGE LAYOUT  
TYPE B SETTING  
Touch the [INSERTION TYPE A] key or the  
[INSERTION TYPE B] key, enter the page  
number where you wish to insert the insert  
paper with the numeric keys, and then  
touch the [ENTER] key.  
9
Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key in the  
screen of step 11 to display a list of the  
selected settings (page 5-16).  
To edit or delete a cover/insert, follow  
steps 1 and 2 on page 5-16. To exit the  
cover/insert settings, touch the upper  
[OK] key in the screen of step 11.  
INPUT THE PAGE NUMBER AND  
PRESS [ENTER]. USE [C] KEY TO AMEND.  
OK  
INSERTION SETTINGS  
INSERTION PAGE  
INSERTION  
TYPE B  
INSERTION  
TYPE A  
INSERTION  
TOTAL:0  
3
13Press the [START] key.  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
BYPASS  
TRAY  
A4  
A4  
ENTER  
PLAIN  
PLAIN  
To cancel covers/inserts settings...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 2.  
(X)  
(Y)  
(Z)  
1
(X) shows the total number of inserts. Up to 100  
inserts can be added. When inserting multiple  
inserts, touch the [ENTER] key after each entry  
of an insertion page number (insertion position)  
with the numeric keys.  
5
2
3
4
(Y) shows the tray selected in step 3 for  
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] and the paper  
size and type.  
(Z) shows the tray selected in step 3 for  
[INSERTION TYPE B SETTING] and the paper  
size and type.  
When the [INSERTION TYPE A] key is  
highlighted, the insert settings apply to  
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING]. When the  
[INSERTION TYPE B] key is highlighted, the  
insert settings apply to [INSERTION TYPE B  
SETTING].  
Touch the [OK] key in the screen of step 9.  
You will return to the screen of step 2.  
When you return to the screen of step 2, the  
[INSERTION TYPE A SETTING] key will be  
highlighted.  
10  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Checking, editing, and deleting cover/insert pages  
The [PAGE LAYOUT] key appears after covers/inserts settings are configured (the settings of step 1 through  
step 7 on pages 5-13 and 5-14).  
The [PAGE LAYOUT] key is used for the following:  
To display the status of covers/inserts pages  
To edit, delete, or add inserted pages  
3
To edit or delete an inserted page, touch the key  
To display the [PAGE LAYOUT] key...  
Configure the settings in step 1 through step 7  
on pages 5-13 and 5-14.  
of the page you wish to edit or delete in the page  
layout screen. When the key is touched, the  
[CANCEL], [DELETE], and [AMEND] keys  
appear.  
1 Touch the [PAGE LAYOUT] key.  
AMEND THE INSERTION?  
OK  
CANCEL  
DELETE  
AMEND  
OK  
CANCEL  
TS  
INSERTION  
TYPE A SETTING  
PAPER TRAY  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
SETTINGS  
INSERTION  
TYPE B SETTING  
PAGE LAYOUT  
To cancel, touch the [CANCEL] key.  
To delete an inserted page, touch the  
[DELETE] key.  
2 The set covers/inserts pages are shown.  
OK  
PAGE LAYOUT  
To edit an inserted page, touch the [AMEND]  
key. The screen of step 5 on page 5-13 or the  
screen of step 5 on page 5-14 appears. Edit  
the page as explained in step 5 on page 5-13  
or step 5 on page 5-14.  
1/2  
INSERTION  
TYPE A  
12/-  
INSERTION  
TYPE A  
<4  
INSERTION  
TYPE B  
7/8  
FRONT COVER  
1
2
If there are multiple screens, touch the  
key to change screens.  
or  
When you have finished checking the  
pages, touch the [OK] key.  
3
Displayed icons:  
: Front side copy only  
: Back side copy only  
: Two-sided copy  
OK  
: No copying  
For inserts, the insertion page also appears.  
INSERTION  
TYPE B  
"
" represents a page number.  
BYPASS  
/- : Front side copy only at page  
/
: Two-sided copy at page  
-/ : Back side copy only at page  
: Insert non-copied insert at page  
/
<
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Examples of covers and inserts  
The relations between the originals and finished copies when covers or inserts are inserted are shown on the  
following pages.  
Covers  
One-sided copying of one-sided originals  
(page 5-18)  
Two-sided copying of one-sided originals  
(page 5-19)  
One-sided copying of two-sided originals  
(page 5-20)  
Two-sided copying of two-sided originals  
(page 5-21)  
Inserts  
One-sided copying of one-sided originals  
(page 5-22)  
Two-sided copying of one-sided originals  
(page 5-22)  
One-sided copying of two-sided originals  
(page 5-22)  
Two-sided copying of two-sided originals  
(page 5-22)  
Symbols used for covers and inserts  
The following symbols are used to make the explanations easier to understand.  
The numbers that appear indicate relations between the originals and copies, and will vary depending on the  
settings.  
Icon  
Icon  
Symbol  
Meaning  
appearing  
in display  
Symbol  
Meaning  
appearing  
in display  
Front cover when not  
copied on.  
Insert when not copied on.  
5
Front cover after one-sided  
copying.  
Insert after one-sided  
copying.  
1
1
1
3
3
3
1
Front cover after two-sided  
copying. (One page is not  
copied on.)  
Insert after one-sided  
copying. (One page is not  
copied on.)  
Front cover after two-sided  
copying.  
Insert  
after  
two-sided  
copying.  
Back cover when not  
copied on.  
One-sided  
original  
or  
output page of regular one-  
sided copying  
Back cover after one-sided  
Two-sided  
output page of regular two-  
sided copying.  
original  
or  
1
6
5
copying  
original.  
of  
one-sided  
Back cover after two-sided  
copying. (One page is not  
copied on.)  
One-sided  
output page of regular one-  
sided copying.  
original  
or  
Back cover after two-sided  
copying.  
One-sided  
output page of regular one-  
sided copying.  
original  
or  
5
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Covers (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)  
One-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
4th page  
5th page  
6th page  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copying on cover  
Resulting copies  
Front cover  
Back cover  
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
5
4
5
6
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
No copying  
No copying  
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5
5
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
1
1
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Covers (Two-sided copying of one-sided originals)  
Two-sided copies are made of the following one-sided originals.  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
4th page  
5th page  
6th page  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copying on cover  
Resulting copies  
Front cover  
Back cover  
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
5
5
No copying  
No copying  
1
1
6
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5
5
5
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
1
1
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
5
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Covers (One-sided copying of Two-sided originals)  
One-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
1
3
5
Copying on cover  
Resulting copies  
Front cover  
Back cover  
1
2
3
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
3
4
2
2
3
3
4
4
3
4
5
3
3
4
4
5
5
4
5
6
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
No copying  
No copying  
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5
5
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
1
1
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Covers (Two-sided copying of two-sided originals)  
Two-sided copies are made of the following two-sided originals.  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
1
3
5
Copying on cover  
Resulting copies  
Front cover  
Back cover  
1
3
3
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
5
5
3
3
5
No copying  
No copying  
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
No copying  
No copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
5
No copying  
No copying  
5
Two-sided  
copying  
1
1
1
1
One-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
5
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
One-sided  
copying  
5
Two-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Inserts (One-sided copying of one-sided originals)  
One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following one-sided originals. The insert is added as  
the third page.  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
4th page  
5th page  
6th page  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Copying on  
insert  
Resulting copies  
(two-sided copying)  
Resulting copies (one-sided copying)  
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
5
6
1
1
1
3
5
6
No copying  
3
3
6
3
3
4
5
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
Inserts (One-sided copying of two-sided originals)  
One-sided and two-sided copying is performed using the following two-sided originals.  
1st page  
2nd page  
3rd page  
1
3
5
Copying on  
insert  
Resulting copies  
(two-sided copying)  
Resulting copies (one-sided copying)  
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
5
4
5
6
5
6
1
1
1
3
5
No copying  
3
3
6
3
3
5
5
One-sided  
copying  
Two-sided  
copying  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Transparency film with insert sheets  
When copying onto transparency film, blank insert sheets can be placed between transparent sheets.  
Example: Inserting insert sheets between transparencies  
This function only operates in "one-sided to one-  
sided" and "two-sided to one-sided" modes.  
Multiple copies cannot be selected in this mode.  
Originals (1-sided)  
The inserts are inserted under each transparency  
as shown at left.  
Select insert paper that is the same size as the  
transparencies.  
Originals (2-sided)  
When feeding insert paper from an inserter,  
copying on the insert paper is not possible.  
Transparencies can be fed from the bypass tray  
or tray 3.  
Insert sheets  
Two-sided originals are  
only supported when  
Inserts can also be  
copied on.  
If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, be sure  
to set the paper size and paper type as explained  
on pages 2-14 and 2-15.  
automatic  
document  
feeding is used.  
If the transparencies are loaded in tray 3, steps  
1 to 5 below are not necessary.  
4 Touch the [OK] key.  
TYPE  
OK  
TYPE/SIZE SETTING  
SIZE  
Load transparency film into the bypass  
tray.  
1
AUTO-INCH  
/
8
2X11  
1
2
AUTO-AB  
A4,B5  
Remove any paper  
already in the bypass  
tray before loading the  
transparency film. (To  
load paper in the bypass  
tray, see pages 2-10 and  
2-11.)  
SIZE INPUT  
NON STANDARD SIZE  
2/2  
If the paper size was changed from an inch size to  
an AB size, or from an AB size to an inch size, be  
sure to set the paper type and size as explained on  
steps 5 to 7 on page 2-14 and steps 8 to 10 on  
5
5 Select the bypass tray.  
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key in the  
main screen and select the bypass tray  
paper type in the paper setting screen  
(touch (X) below).  
0
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
A4  
AUTO  
N
PLAIN  
FOR COPY.  
EXPOSURE  
0
Y
N
5. A4  
PLAIN  
AUTO  
PAPER SELECT  
ORIGINAL  
2. B5  
PLAIN  
A4  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
100%  
PLAIN  
COPY RATIO  
HEAVY PAPER  
PLAIN  
5. A
PLAIN  
PAPER SELECT  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
To display the special modes screen...  
(X)  
3 Touch the [TRANSPARENCY] key.  
Touch the [TRANSPARENCY INSERTS]  
key in the special modes screen (2nd  
screen).  
6
TYPE.  
LETTER HEAD  
PRE-PUNCHED  
COLOUR  
HEAVY PAPER  
The Transparency inserts  
LABELS  
SPECIAL MODES  
setting screen will appear.  
The transparency inserts  
TRANSPARENCY  
TRANSPARENCY  
INSERTS  
COVERS/INSERTS  
icon (  
, etc.) will also  
appear in the upper left  
corner of the screen to  
indicate that the function  
is turned on.  
BOOK COPY  
TAB COPY  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Set the insertion conditions for the insert  
paper.  
Touch the outer [OK] key in the screen of  
step 7.  
7
8
OK  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
CANCEL  
OK  
PRINT ON INSERT SHEETS  
YES NO  
INSERTION SHEET  
TRAY5  
NOTE  
If insert paper is fed from an inserter, the output will  
be delivered to the finisher (or saddle stitch finisher).  
A4  
PLAIN  
(X)  
(Y)  
About the steps that follow  
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
13.  
1
2
Select whether or not the insert paper will be  
copied on with the (X) keys ([YES] or [NO]). If  
[YES] is selected, insert paper cannot be fed  
from an inserter.  
To cancel the Transparency film with insert sheets  
function, touch the [CANCEL] key on the  
Transparency film with insert sheets setting screen.  
The (Y) key shows the tray selected for the insert  
paper and the paper size and type. To select a  
different tray, touch this key to display the tray  
selection screen and select the tray that has the  
insert paper.  
Multi shot  
Multiple original pages can be copied onto one sheet of copy paper in a uniform layout. Select 2in1 to copy two  
original pages onto one sheet, or 4in1 to copy four original pages onto one sheet. This function is convenient when  
you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format, or show a view of all pages in a document.  
[Example] Copying 4 original pages onto one sheet of paper  
(Page number : 4in1, layout : left top : right top (see the next page))  
When using the multi shot function, place the  
One-sided copies from  
one-sided originals  
originals, select the desired paper size, and  
select the copying mode before selecting the  
multi shot function on the special modes screen.  
When using the multi shot function, the  
appropriate copy ratio will be automatically set  
based on the original size, paper size, and the  
number of originals to be copied onto one sheet.  
The minimum reduction ratio is 25%. The  
original size, copy paper size, and selected  
Copies  
number of original pages may require that the  
One-sided copies from  
ratio be less than 25%. As copying will take  
place at 25% in this case, part of the original  
images may be cut off.  
two-sided originals  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Touch the [OK] key (inside [OK] key) on  
the multi shot setting screen.  
You will return to the special modes screen.  
To display the special modes screen...  
4
5
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes  
screen.  
Touch the [MULTI SHOT] key in the special  
modes screen (2nd screen).  
1
2
The MULTI SHOT setting  
screen will appear.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
TRANSPARENCY  
MULTI SHOT  
A multi shot icon (  
,
INSERTS  
etc.) will also appear in  
the upper left of the  
screen to indicate that  
the function is turned on.  
About the steps that follow  
TAB COPY  
CARD SHOT  
If an automatic document feeder is being used, see  
pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document glass is  
being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-13.  
Select the number of images to be copied  
onto one sheet of copy paper.  
To cancel the multi shot function, touch the [CANCEL]  
key in the multi shot setting screen (the screen of step  
2).  
If  
orientation of the copy  
paper and the  
needed,  
the  
SPECIAL MODES  
MULTI SHOT  
2in1  
4in1  
orientation of the images  
will be rotated.  
3 Select the layout.  
OK  
5
Select the order in which  
the originals will be  
arranged on the copy.  
CANCEL  
OK  
LAYOUT  
Shot number  
2in1  
Layout  
4in1  
The arrows in the above diagram indicate the  
directions in which the images are arranged.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Book copy  
This function is convenient when you wish to compile copies of books or other bound originals into an attractive  
pamphlet format. The two pages of the open book are scanned as a set, and two pages each are copied onto the  
front and back sides of the copy paper (four pages are copied onto one sheet of copy paper). This allows the copies  
to be folded down the centre and made into a pamphlet.  
[Example] Book copying an 8-page pamphlet  
Scan the originals from the first page to the last  
page. The order of copying will be automatically  
adjusted by the machine.  
Originals  
Finished copies are  
folded in two.  
Left binding  
Either left binding (right to left turning) or right  
binding (left to right turning) can be selected.  
Four originals will be copied onto one sheet.  
Blank pages may be automatically produced at  
the end depending on the number of the originals.  
First page  
First page  
If a saddle stitch finisher is installed, book copy  
can be used in combination with the pamphlet  
function to staple and fold the copies at the  
centreline.  
Right binding  
First page  
First page  
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes  
screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
To display the special modes screen...  
4
5
Place the originals on the document glass.  
(page 4-3)  
Touch the [BOOK COPY] key in the special  
modes screen (2nd screen).  
1
Scan the original pages in  
the following order:  
Opened front and back  
cover  
Opened inside of front  
cover and 1st page  
Opened 2nd and 3rd  
page  
The  
BOOK  
COPY  
SPECIAL MODES  
setting  
screen  
will  
TRANSPARENCY  
INSERTS  
COVERS/INSERTS  
appear. The book copy  
icon ( , etc.) will also  
appear in the upper left  
corner of the screen to  
indicate that the function  
is turned on.  
BOOK COPY  
TAB COPY  
Opened last page and  
inside of back cover  
Select whether the book opens to the left or  
to the right, and touch the [OK] key in the  
book copy setting screen.  
2
Make sure that the desired paper size has  
been selected.  
6
If the desired paper size  
You will return to the  
special modes screen.  
RIGHT  
BINDING  
LEFT  
BINDING  
is not selected, select  
the desired size.  
AUTO A3  
PAPER SELECT  
CO  
SET  
100%  
Select the number of copies and any other  
desired copy settings, and then press the  
[START] key.  
7
8
3 Select any desired cover settings.  
CANCEL  
OK  
If you wish to use a  
different type of paper for  
the cover, perform steps  
4 to 12 on pages 5-6 to 5-  
Place the next two pages and press the  
[START] key. Repeat until all pages have  
been scanned, and then touch the [READ-  
END] key.  
RIGHT  
NG  
BINDING  
COVER  
SETTING  
If you do not wish to use  
a different type of paper,  
continue from step 4.  
When book copy is selected, two-sided  
copying is automatically selected.  
To cancel the book copy function, touch the [CANCEL] key  
in the book copy setting screen (the screen of step 2).  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Tab copy  
Copying is possible on the tabs of tabbed paper. Prepare appropriate originals for the tab captions.  
[Example]  
Original  
Tabbed paper  
Copy  
Area A  
Area B  
Tab width  
A4 : Maximum of 20 mm  
(8-1/2" x 11" : Maximum of 5/8")  
The tab caption is shifted by the amount of the tab width setting, so keep areas A and B blank.  
Relations between originals and tabbed paper  
Left binding  
Right binding  
Right binding  
(normal top-bottom)  
(Inverted top-bottom)  
(Inverted top-bottom)  
5
Prepare  
originals  
these  
(Normal orderA-E)  
(Reverse orderE-A)  
(Normal orderA-E)  
Leading edge  
of original  
Originals placed  
face up in the  
document feeder  
Leading edge  
of original  
Originals  
Leading edge  
of original  
(Normal orderA-E)  
(Normal orderA-E)  
(Reverse orderE-A)  
Originals placed  
on the document  
glass  
(Reverse  
orderE-A)  
(Normal  
orderA-E)  
(Normal  
order A-E)  
Load  
tabbed  
1
Tabbed  
paper  
paper in the  
bypass tray or  
tray 3  
2
3
4
5
Feeding  
direction  
Feeding  
direction  
Feeding  
direction  
Result  
(Top-bottom  
reversed)  
(Top-bottom  
normal)  
(Top-bottom  
reversed)  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Select "TAB PAPER" for the paper type  
setting.  
5
To display the special modes screen...  
The paper type setting is explained in “Setting the  
If you are using tray 3, see “Setting the paper size  
Touch the [TAB COPY] key in the special  
modes screen (2nd screen).  
1
About the steps that follow  
SPECIAL MODES  
The TAB COPY setting  
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
screen will appear. A  
tab copy icon ( ) will  
TRANSPARENCY  
INSERTS  
COVERS/INSERTS  
also appear in the  
BOOK COPY  
TAB COPY  
upper left corner of the  
screen to indicate that  
the function is turned  
on.  
When performing tab copying with a right  
binding  
If you are using left-binding tabbed paper for a right  
binding, either stack the sheets in reverse order or  
scan the originals in reverse order.(See the table on  
the previous page.)  
If necessary, set the image shift width (tab)  
and touch the [OK] key.  
2
3
Set the image shift  
OK  
width (tab) with the  
CANCEL  
OK  
and  
keys.  
To cancel the tab copy function, touch the [CANCEL]  
key in the tab copy setting screen (the screen of step  
2).  
IMAGE SHIFT  
The width can be set  
from 0 to 20 mm (0 to  
5/8") in increments of  
1 mm (1/8").  
(0 20)  
mm  
10  
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes  
screen.  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
4 Load tabbed paper in the bypass tray.  
Place the tabbed paper  
so that the edges with  
the tabs are the trailing  
edge.  
To use tab paper in tray  
3, set the paper type  
setting of tray 3 to "TAB  
PAPER" in the tray  
settings of the system  
settings (page 2-14).  
To load tabbed paper in  
NOTE  
The width of the tabbed paper can be up to A4 width  
(210 mm) + 20 mm (or 8-1/2" x 11" width (8-1/2") +  
5/8").  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Card shot  
When copying a card, this function allows you to combine the front and back sides on a single sheet of paper.  
Copying is only possible on standard size paper.  
A copy ratio cannot be selected when using this  
function.  
Original  
CARD  
Copy  
The image cannot be rotated when using this  
function.  
CARD  
Front of  
card  
CARD  
Back of  
card  
Example:  
Portrait  
A4 (8-1/2") size  
Example:  
Landscape  
A4 (8-1/2") size  
Touch the [PAPER SELECT] key and then  
select the desired paper size.  
Enter the X dimension (width) and Y  
dimension (length) of the original with the  
keys.  
1
3
The selected paper size  
READY TO SCAN FOR COPY.  
key is highlighted and  
the paper selection  
screen closes.  
CANCEL  
OK  
1. A4  
PLAIN  
2. B5  
PLAIN  
A4  
PLAIN  
SIZE RESET  
HEAVY PAPER  
PLAIN  
5. A4  
PLAIN  
3. A4  
4. A3  
5
FIT TO  
PAGE  
NOTE  
If paper of the desired size is not loaded in any tray,  
load paper of the required size in a paper tray or the  
size" on page 2-14.)  
X (width) is initially selected. Enter X and then  
touch the Y ( ) key to enter Y.  
To return the X and Y values to the initial  
settings configured in the administrator  
settings, touch the [SIZE RESET] key. (See  
"CARD SHOT SETTINGS" on page 16 of the  
administrator settings guide.)  
To have the images enlarged or reduced by a  
suitable ratio based on the entered original  
size so that the front and back sides fit into the  
selected paper size, touch the [FIT TO PAGE]  
key.  
To display the special modes screen...  
Touch the [CARD SHOT] key in the special  
modes screen (2nd screen).  
2
The CARD SHOT  
setting screen will  
appear. A card shot  
icon ( , etc.) will also  
appear in the upper left  
corner of the screen to  
TRANSPARENCY  
INSERTS  
MULTI SHOT  
CARD SHOT  
TAB COPY  
indicate  
that  
the  
function is turned on.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Place the back side of the original face  
down on the document glass (see step 5).  
4 Touch the outer [OK] key.  
8
You will return to the  
OK  
main screen of copy  
mode.  
CANCEL  
9 Press the [START] key.  
SIZE RESET  
The back side of the  
card is scanned.  
FIT TO  
PAGE  
5 Place the original on the document glass.  
Place the front side of  
the original face down  
10Touch the [READ-END] key.  
and  
close  
the  
document cover.  
NOTE  
The original must be placed on the document glass.  
The document feeder (automatic document feeding  
function) cannot be used.  
Follow steps 4 through 5 of "Copying from  
6
To cancel the card shot function, touch the  
[CANCEL] key in the card shot setting screen (the  
screen of step 4).  
7 Press the [START] key.  
The front side of the  
card is scanned.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Mirror image  
This function is used to print a mirror image of the original. The images will be inverted in the right to left direction  
on the copies.  
Original  
Copy  
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
To display the special modes screen...  
2
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
Touch the [MIRROR IMAGE] key in the  
special modes screen (3rd screen).  
The [MIRROR IMAGE]  
1
About the steps that follow  
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
13.  
key will be highlighted to  
ECIAL MODES  
indicate that the function  
is turned on, and the  
MIRROR  
IMAGE  
B/W  
REVERSE  
mirror image icon (  
)
will appear in the upper  
left of the screen.  
To cancel the mirror image function, touch the  
[MIRROR IMAGE] key in the special modes screen  
(the screen of step 1).  
5
B/W reverse  
Black and white are reversed in the copy to create a negative image.  
NOTES  
When this function is selected, the exposure mode setting (page 4-14) automatically changes to "Text".  
Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be printed with black/white reverse  
Original  
B/W reverse copy  
Touch the [OK] key in the special modes  
screen.  
2
To display the special modes screen...  
You will return to the main screen of copy mode.  
Touch the [B/W REVERSE] key in the  
special modes screen (3rd screen).  
The [B/W REVERSE]  
About the steps that follow  
1
If an automatic document feeder is being used,  
see pages 4-7 through 4-10. If the document  
glass is being used, see pages 4-11 through 4-  
key will be highlighted to  
ECIAL MODES  
indicate that the function  
is turned on, and the  
B/W  
REVERSE  
MIRROR  
IMAGE  
mirror image icon (  
will appear in the upper  
left of the screen.  
)
To cancel the B/W reverse function, touch the [B/W  
REVERSE] key in the special modes screen (the  
screen of step 1).  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SPECIAL MODES  
Print menu  
The date, a stamp, page numbers, and entered text can be printed on copies. Four selections are available for the  
PRINT MENU:  
• Date print (page 5-35)  
• Stamp (page 5-36)  
This prints the date on the paper.  
[Example] Printing 2010/APR/4 in the upper right-  
hand corner of the paper  
Print a message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" in  
reverse text on the paper.  
[Example] Printing "CONFIDENTIAL" in the upper  
right-hand corner of the paper  
2010/APR/4  
CONFIDENTIAL  
The format of the date and the character that  
separates the year, month, and day can be changed.  
One of 12 stamps can be selected.  
• Page numbering (page 5-37)  
Page numbers can be printed on copies.  
[Example] Printing page numbers in the bottom right-  
hand corner of the paper  
• Text (page 5-41)  
Entered text can be printed.  
[Example] Printing "Meeting" in the upper left-hand  
corner of the paper  
Meeting  
Up to 50 characters can be printed. You can store up  
to 30 sequences of frequently used text.  
The format of the page number can be changed.  
Six printing positions are available: left, centre, or right of the top or bottom of the page.  
Each printing position is divided into an area for the date, page number, and text (A below), and an area for the stamp  
(B below).  
Top centre  
Printing  
area  
Maximum number of  
settings  
Print menu  
Top left  
Top right  
DATE  
A
B
One position only  
6 positions  
STAMP  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
A
A
One position only  
6 positions  
TEXT  
Bottom left  
Bottom right  
Bottom centre  
NOTES  
A part that overlaps the printed text will not be copied.  
If the set text content overlaps the print content of another position, the central print content will be moved to the  
bottom, the content on the left will be next, and the content on the right will be placed on top in that order such  
that only the content visible at the top is printed. Content that is hidden due to overlapping will not be printed.  
The printed text will be printed at the set size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size.  
The printed text will also be printed at the set density regardless of the copy exposure.  
Some copy paper sizes may cause the printed contents to be cut off or the print position to shift.  
If a copy job with a print menu setting is saved using the document filing function, the print menu setting will not  
be saved. If you wish to print a file saved in copy mode and use a print menu setting, use the special modes in  
the Job settings / print screen (or the document filing print screen in the Web page if the machine is connected  
to a network) to select the print menu setting. (A print menu setting cannot be selected when printing a file saved  
in a mode other than copy mode.)  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIAL MODES  
Common operation procedure for using the print menu  
To select print menu settings at another  
print position, repeat steps 2 and 3.  
4
To display the special modes screen...  
See "General procedure for using special functions" on  
page 5-2.  
NOTES  
If the [DATE], [PAGE NUMBERING], or [TEXT] key  
is touched when other than a "STAMP" print menu  
setting has been selected for the print position  
selected in step 2, a message will appear. To  
overwrite the previously set print content of the  
print menu that you touched, touch the [YES] key.  
To keep the previous settings, touch the [NO] key.  
Touch the [PRINT MENU] key in the special  
modes screen (3rd screen).  
1
The print menu setting  
screen will appear. The  
print menu icon ( ) will  
also appear in the upper  
left corner of the screen  
to indicate that the  
function is turned on.  
The "DATE" and "PAGE NUMBERING" cannot be set  
in multiple positions. If either of these keys is touched  
when a date or page numbering setting has already  
been configured, a message will appear asking you if  
you wish to move the print settings to the position that  
you selected in step 2. To move the print settings,  
touch the [YES] key. Otherwise touch the [NO] key.  
B/W  
REVERSE  
PRINT MENU  
2 Select the print position.  
key.  
5 Touch the  
Six  
positions  
are  
SPECIAL MODES  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
available: left, centre,  
or right of the top or  
bottom of the page.  
The touched key is  
highlighted.  
LAYOU  
1/2  
PRINT MENU  
DATE  
STAMP  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
TEXT  
N
The keys indicating the print position appear as  
follows depending on the state of the setting:  
5
To specify the orientation of the original,  
touch the [ORIGINAL ORIENTATION] key.  
6
7
Not selected, print menu setting has not  
been selected.  
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
LAYOUT  
OK  
2/2  
CANCEL  
PRINT MENU  
ORIGINAL ORIENTATION  
2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE  
Selected during selection of the print  
menu setting.  
PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS  
Not selected, print menu setting has  
already been selected.  
If you placed a two-sided original, touch the  
] key to specify the binding style (book or  
[
The image displayed within each key varies  
depending on the key position.  
tablet). The icon of the selected binding style is  
highlighted.  
3 Select the print menu.  
If you are adding covers or inserts, select  
whether or not you wish to print on the  
covers or inserts.  
The settings screen of  
OK  
the  
print  
menu  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
appears.  
For information on  
each of the print  
1/2  
LAYOUT  
OK  
2/2  
CANCEL  
DATE  
STAMP  
PRINT MENU  
ORIGINAL ORIENTATION  
2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
TEXT  
menus,  
see  
the  
PRINT ON COVERS/INSERTS WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS  
settings of each.  
If you do not wish to print on covers or inserts,  
touch the checkbox to remove the checkmark.  
DATE (page 5-35) STAMP (page 5-36)  
PAGE NUMBERING (page 5-37) TEXT (page 5-  
41)  
NOTES  
If you are not copying on covers or inserts, printing will  
not take place on these even if a checkmark appears.  
A page number is never printed on covers or  
inserts, regardless of the above setting.  
If covers/inserts have been disabled in the  
administrator settings, the checkbox will be greyed  
out to prevent selection.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Check the print layout if needed (page 5-  
43).  
8
NOTE  
To cancel print menu...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the screen of step 3.  
To display the layout  
OK  
and print content of the  
OK  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
configured print menu,  
touch the [LAYOUT]  
key. The position can  
2-SIDED ORIGINAL TYPE  
2
be  
changed  
and  
S WHEN COPYING ON COVERS/INSERTS  
settings cancelled if  
needed.  
Touch the [OK] key on the print menu  
setting screen.  
9
Touch the [OK] key on the special modes  
screen.  
10  
About the steps that follow  
If an automatic document feeder is being used, see  
pages 4-7 through 4-10.  
If the document glass is being used, see pages 4-11  
through 4-13.  
Printing in combination with other special functions  
When a print menu is combined with one of the following special modes, printing will reflect the selected special  
mode.  
Special modes  
Margin shift  
Printing operation  
Like the copy image, the printed contents are shifted in accordance with the set margin.  
The print content is printed on each copy sheet.  
Dual page copy  
Pamphlet copy  
Book copy  
The print content is printed on each page of the "book".  
Multi shot  
Card shot  
The print content is printed on each copy sheet.  
Covers/inserts  
In the print menu settings, specify whether or not the print content is printed on covers and inserts.  
NOTE  
When combined with "Erase", "Job build", "Mirror image", "B/W reverse", or "Tab copy", printing takes place  
normally at the set position on the paper.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Printing the date on copies  
The date can be printed on copies. Four selections each are available for the date format and the character that  
separates the year, month, and day.  
NOTE  
The date must be previously set in the system settings. (See page 2-18.)  
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
1
5 Select the pages to be printed on.  
CANCEL OK  
Select whether to print  
on only the first page,  
or all pages. The  
FIRST PAGE  
CURRENT SETTING  
2010/APR/04  
2 Touch the [DATE] key.  
touched  
highlighted.  
key  
is  
ALL PAGES  
OK  
DATE CHANGE  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
1/2  
DATE  
STAMP  
6 Touch the [OK] key.  
PA
NUMBG  
TEXT  
CANCEL  
OK  
3 Select the date format.  
FIRSGE  
CURRENT SETTING  
2010/APR/04  
The selected date format  
is highlighted.  
DATE  
ALL PAGES  
DATE CHANGE  
YYYY/MM/DD  
MM/DD/YYYY  
DD/MM/YYYY  
MM DD, YYYY  
If you selected [YYYY/  
MM/DD], [MM/DD/YYYY],  
or [DD/MM/YYYY], you  
can select the character  
that separates the year,  
5
Continue from step 4 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
7
month, and date. Select [/] (slash), [.] (period), [-]  
(hyphen), or [ ] (space).  
4 Check the date and format.  
NOTE  
To cancel a date print setting...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the date selection screen.  
(The screen of step 6.)  
The date to be printed  
CANCEL  
OK  
is  
displayed  
in  
FIRST PAGE  
CURRENT SETTING  
2010/APR/04  
"CURRENT SETTING"  
in the selected format.  
The date that appears  
is the date set in the  
machine. If you need to  
ALL PAGES  
DATE CHANGE  
change the date, touch the [DATE CHANGE] key.  
The following screen appears.  
OK  
DATE CHANGE  
YEAR  
2010  
MONTH  
04  
DAY  
04  
Touch the key of the number (year, month, or day)  
that needs to be changed, and then adjust the  
number with the  
or  
key. When finished,  
touch the [OK] key.  
NOTE  
If you select a non-existent date (for example, Feb. 30),  
the [OK] key will grey out to prevent entry of the date.  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Printing a stamp (reverse text) on copies  
A message such as "CONFIDENTIAL" can be printed in reverse text on copies.  
The following 12 messages are available.  
CONFIDENTIAL  
FOR YOUR INFO.  
URGENT  
PRIORITY  
DO NOT COPY  
DRAFT  
PRELIMINARY  
IMPORTANT  
TOP SECRET  
FINAL  
COPY  
PLEASE REPLY  
You can select from three density levels for the background of the stamp.  
Two selections are available for the size of the stamp.  
NOTE  
The text of the stamp cannot be edited.  
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
1
5 Select the desired stamp size.  
"LARGER" is initially  
selected. To make the  
stamp smaller, touch  
CANCEL  
OK  
FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
1/2  
2 Touch the [STAMP] key.  
EXPOSURE  
the  
SMALLER]  
[LARGER/  
key.  
SIZE  
ALL PAGES  
LARGER  
OK  
"Smaller" is selected  
when [SMALLER] is  
highlighted.  
SMALLER  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
1/2  
DATE  
STAMP  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
T
6 Select the pages to be printed on.  
Select whether to print  
on only the first page,  
or all pages. The  
CANCEL  
OK  
3 Select the stamp that you wish to print.  
FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
1/2  
EXPOSURE  
touched  
highlighted.  
key  
is  
SIZE  
The selected stamp is  
ALL PAGES  
STAMP  
LARGER  
highlighted.  
desired stamp does not  
appear, change  
screens with the  
or key.  
If  
the  
SMALLER  
1/2  
CONFIDENTIAL  
FOR YOUR INFO.  
URGENT  
PRIORITY  
DO NOT COPY  
DRAFT  
7 Touch the [OK] key.  
CANCEL  
OK  
4 Adjust the exposure as needed.  
FIRST E  
1
2
3
1/2  
EXPOSURE  
The density of the  
background of the  
SIZE  
CANCEL  
OK  
ALL PAGES  
LARGER  
FIRST PAGE  
1
2
3
1/2  
stamp can be adjusted.  
Touch the [EXPOSURE]  
key to display the  
following screen.  
SMALLER  
EXPOSURE  
SE  
ALL PAGES  
LA
Continue from step 4 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
SMALLER  
8
Touch the  
darker  
Touch the  
lighter background (3  
levels).  
key for a  
background.  
key for a  
EXPOSURE  
2
NOTE  
1
3
To cancel a stamp setting...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the stamp selection  
When finished, touch  
the [OK] key.  
screen. (The screen of step 7.)  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Printing the page number on copies  
The page number can be printed on copies. One of 6 formats can be selected for the page number.  
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
If you need to change the starting or ending  
number of page numbering, the first page  
printed on, or the print settings for covers/  
inserts, touch the [PAGE NUMBER] key.  
1
4
2 Touch the [PAGE NUMBERING] key.  
OK  
CANCEL  
TOTAL PAGE  
AUTO  
OK  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
MANUAL  
1/2  
DATE  
STAMP  
PAGE NUMBER  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
TEXT  
5 Touch the [MANUAL] key.  
3 Select the page number format.  
PAGE NUMBER  
FIRST NUMBER  
1
LA  
The selected format is  
highlighted.  
AUTO  
PAGE NUMBERING  
PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT  
INTING STARTS FROM  
1
MANUAL  
(1),(2),(3)..  
1,2,3..  
-1-,-2-,-3-..  
<1>,<2>,<3>..  
P.1,P.2,P.3..  
/5,2/5,3/5..  
Enter settings for "FIRST NUMBER",  
6
"LAST  
NUMBER",  
and  
"PRINTING  
STARTS FROM SHEET".  
5
If you selected "1/5, 2/5, 3/5",  
Touch each key so that  
it is highlighted, and  
then enter the number  
with the numeric keys  
(1 to 999).  
"PAGE NUMBER/TOTAL PAGES" will be printed.  
"AUTO" is initially selected for "TOTAL PAGE",  
which means that the number of scanned original  
pages is automatically used. If you need to enter  
the total pages manually (for example, when a  
large number of originals are scanned in batches),  
touch the [MANUAL] key to display the total page  
entry screen.  
FIRST NUMBER  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
1
PRINTING STARROM SHEET  
1
To return a number to  
its initial value (FIRST  
NUMBER: 1, LAST NUMBER: AUTO, PRINTING  
STARTS FROM SHEET: 1), touch the [C] (clear)  
key while the key of the number is highlighted. If  
you enter the wrong number, press the [C] (clear)  
key and enter the correct number.  
CANCEL  
OK  
PAGE NUMBERING  
PAGE NUMBERING FORMAT  
OK  
TOTAL PAGE  
AUTO  
(1),(2),(3)..  
1,2,3..  
TOTAL PAGE  
30  
-1-,-2-,-3-..  
<1>,<2>,<3>..  
P.1,P.2,P.3..  
1/5,2/5,3/5..  
NOTES  
PAGE  
MANUAL  
A last number smaller than the "FIRST NUMBER"  
cannot be set.  
"LAST NUMBER" is initially set to "AUTO", which  
means that the page number is printed on each  
page through the final page in accordance with the  
"FIRST NUMBER" and "PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET" settings.  
A number less than the total page number is set as  
the last number, the page number will not be  
printed on the pages that follow the set number.  
Enter the total pages (1 to 999) with the numeric  
keys and touch the [OK] key.  
NOTES  
When two-sided copying is performed, each side of  
the paper is counted as a page. If the last page is  
blank, it will not be included in the total pages.  
However, if [COUNT BACK COVER] is selected,  
the last page will be counted. (See step 7.)  
When used in combination with "Dual page copy",  
"Multi shot", or "Card shot", the number of copied  
images is the total pages.  
Unlike the first and last page numbers, "PRINTING  
STARTS FROM SHEET" specifies the sheet of paper  
(not the page number) from which printing of the page  
number begins.  
For example, when "3" is selected for one-sided  
copying, printing of the page number will start from the  
3rd sheet of copy paper (the copy of the 3rd original  
page). When "3" is selected for two-sided copying,  
printing of the page number will start from the 3rd sheet  
of copy paper, which is the copy of the 5th original page.  
When used in combination with "Pamphlet copy" or  
"Book copy", the number of pages in the "book" is  
the total pages.  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
When covers/inserts are added and you  
7
9 Touch the [OK] key.  
wish to include the covers/inserts in the  
page number count, touch the [COVERS/  
INSERTS COUNTING] key.  
OK  
LAST NUMBER  
OK  
AUTO  
COVERS/INSERTS  
COUNTING  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
COVERS/INSERTS  
COUNTING  
10Touch the [OK] key.  
Select the checkboxes of the items that  
you wish to include in the page number  
count and then touch the [OK] key.  
8
OK  
CANCEL  
TOTAL PAGE  
AUTO  
OK  
COVERS/INSERTS COUNTING  
COUNT FRONT COVER  
MANUAL  
PAGE NUMBER  
COUNT INSERTS  
2
COUNT BACK COVER  
1
Front cover  
image  
Continue from step 4 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
Insert  
image  
Back cover  
image  
11  
Items that are selected are reflected in the print  
image on the right side of the screen.  
NOTE  
NOTES  
To cancel a page number setting...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the page number  
selection screen. (The screen of step 10.)  
When an item is selected, one inserted sheet (front  
cover, insert, or back cover) is counted as one page  
during one-sided copying, and two pages during  
two-sided copying. However, if one-sided copying  
is used for the body pages and two-sided copying is  
used for the inserted sheets, each body page will  
be counted as one page and each inserted sheet  
will be counted as two pages.  
Printing never takes place on the front cover and back  
cover, regardless of whether or not these are counted.  
To print on an insert, the insert must be counted  
and it must be copied on.  
NOTES  
Copying in group mode is not possible when page number printing is selected. The mode will automatically switch to sort mode.  
When the page number print position is set to the left or right side and "Pamphlet copy" or "Book copy" is  
selected, the position of the page numbers will alternate so that they are always on the outside when the  
pamphlet/book is opened. If a stamp is set in an area with a page numbering setting, the position of the stamp  
will alternate in the same way.  
If another item is set in a position that changes, that item will appear in the position that alternates with the page  
number position.  
Print menus not related to the alternating print positions will appear in their set positions.  
[Example] When the page number format "1, 2, 3.." is selected when performing pamphlet copying of 4 pages,  
the copies will appear as shown below.  
In this example, the page number is at the bottom of the page and the date is at the top, so the  
position of the date does not change.  
Print settings  
Front  
Back  
Date  
2010/APR/4  
2010/APR/4  
2010/APR/4  
2010/APR/4  
CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
CONFIDENTIAL  
Stamp  
Page numbering  
Text  
Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting  
Minutes of meeting Minutes of meeting  
4
1
2
3
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Examples of page number printing  
Page number printing during one-sided copying (5 originals)  
Setting  
TOTAL PAGE  
Value  
AUTO  
1
1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page  
FIRST NUMBER  
LAST NUMBER  
A B C D E  
AUTO  
1/5  
2/5  
3/5  
4/5  
5/5  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET  
1
FIRST NUMBER: 11  
11/15  
11/13  
1/2  
12/15  
12/13  
2/2  
13/15  
13/13  
14/15  
15/15  
FIRST NUMBER: 11  
LAST NUMBER: 13  
Not printed Not printed  
Printed contents when  
settings are changed as  
follows  
TOTAL PAGE: 2  
Not printed Not printed Not printed  
TOTAL PAGE: 15  
FIRST NUMBER: 11  
LAST NUMBER: 13  
11/15  
12/15  
13/15  
1/3  
Not printed Not printed  
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed  
2/3  
3/3  
Page number printing during two-sided copying (9 originals)  
1st page  
Front Back  
2nd page  
Front Back  
3rd page  
Front Back  
4th page  
5th page  
Setting  
Value  
Front  
Back  
Front  
Back  
TOTAL PAGE  
AUTO  
1
FIRST  
NUMBER  
A B C D E F G H I  
1/9  
2/9  
3/9  
4/9  
5/9  
6/9  
7/9  
3/5  
8/9  
4/5  
9/9  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
5
PRINTING  
STARTS FROM  
SHEET  
1
Printedcontents PRINTING  
when settings STARTS  
are changed as FROM  
follows SHEET: 3  
Not  
Not  
Not  
Not  
Not  
printed  
1/5  
2/5  
5/5  
printed printed printed printed  
Page number printing during one-sided copying of body pages with covers inserted (4 originals)  
1st page  
Setting  
Value  
(Front  
cover)  
2nd page 3rd page 4th page 5th page  
TOTAL PAGE  
AUTO  
1
FIRST NUMBER  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
A B C D  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET  
1
1/4  
2/4  
3/4  
4/4  
COUNT FRONT COVER  
Not selected  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET: 2  
Not printed Not printed  
1/3  
3/5  
2/3  
4/5  
3/3  
5/5  
COUNT FRONT  
COVER: Selected  
Not printed  
2/5  
Printed contents when  
settings are changed  
as follows  
(count)  
COUNT FRONT  
COVER: Selected  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET: 2  
Not printed  
1/4  
2/4  
3/4  
4/4  
(count)  
When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.  
Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with covers (one-side copying) inserted (9 originals)  
1st page  
2nd page  
Front Back  
3rd page  
Front Back  
4th page  
Front Back  
5th page  
Front Back  
(front cover)  
Setting  
Value  
Front  
Back  
TOTAL PAGE  
FIRST NUMBER  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
1
AUTO  
PRINTING  
STARTS  
FROM SHEET  
A
B C D E F G H I  
1
1/8  
2/8  
3/8  
4/8  
5/8  
6/8  
7/8  
8/8  
COUNTFRONT  
COVER  
Not selected  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET: 3  
Not  
Not  
Not  
Not  
Not  
Not  
1/4  
2/4  
3/4  
4/4  
printed printed printed printed printed printed  
Printed  
contents  
when  
settings are  
changed as  
follows  
COUNT FRONT  
COVER: Selected  
Not printed Not printed  
3/10  
4/10  
5/10  
1/6  
6/10  
2/6  
7/10  
8/10  
9/10  
10/10  
(count)  
(count)  
COUNT FRONT  
COVER: Selected  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET: 3  
Not  
Not  
Not  
Not  
printed printed  
(count) (count)  
3/6  
4/6  
5/6  
6/6  
printed printed  
When a back cover is inserted, page numbers are counted and printed in the same way.  
Note that page numbers are never printed on front and back covers.  
Page number printing during one-sided copying with inserts (4 originals; 5 originals when copying on inserts)  
3rd page  
Setting  
TOTAL PAGE  
Value  
1st page 2nd page  
4th page 5th page  
(insert)  
AUTO  
1
FIRST NUMBER  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
A B C D E  
PRINTING STARTS FROM  
SHEET  
1
1/4  
2/4  
3/4  
4/4  
COUNT INSERTS  
Not selected  
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3 Not printed Not printed Not printed  
1/2  
4/5  
2/2  
5/5  
Printed contents when  
copying on inserts and  
settings are changed as  
follows  
COUNT INSERTS: Selected  
1/5  
2/5  
3/5 (count)  
COUNT INSERTS: Selected  
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3  
Not printed Not printed 1/3 (count)  
2/3  
4/5  
2/3  
3/3  
5/5  
3/3  
Not printed  
(count)  
Printed contents when not  
copying on inserts and  
settings are changed as  
follows  
COUNT INSERTS: Selected  
1/5  
2/5  
COUNT INSERTS: Selected  
PRINTING STARTS FROM SHEET: 3  
Not printed  
(count)  
Not printed Not printed  
When inserts are not copied on, the page number is not printed.  
Page number printing during two-sided copying of body pages with inserts (one-side copying) (9 originals)  
3rd page  
1st page  
Front Back  
2nd page  
Front Back  
4th page  
Front Back  
5th page  
Front Back  
(insert)  
Setting  
Value  
Front  
Back  
TOTAL PAGE  
AUTO  
1
FIRST NUMBER  
LAST NUMBER  
AUTO  
A B C D E  
F G H I  
PRINTING STARTS  
FROM SHEET  
1
1/8  
2/8  
3/8  
4/8  
5/8  
6/8  
7/8  
8/8  
COUNT INSERTS Not selected  
Printed contents  
when settings are  
changed as follows Selected  
COUNT  
INSERTS:  
Not  
printed  
(count)  
1/10  
2/10  
3/10  
4/10  
5/10  
7/10  
8/10  
9/10  
10/10  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Printing entered text on copies  
Entered text can be printed on copies. Up to 50 characters can be printed.  
Up to 30 sequences of frequently used text can be stored. See "Storing text sequences" (page 5-42).  
NOTE  
When the machine is connected to a network, the printed text sequences can be stored and deleted in the Web  
page. For details, see Help in the Web page.  
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
1
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
OK  
To edit the selected text  
sequence, touch the  
[DIRECT ENTRY] key  
to display the character  
entry screen. The  
selected text sequence  
CANCEL  
3
DIRECT E
1/5  
6
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.  
04  
05  
06  
OK  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
is  
entered.  
For  
1/2  
DATE  
STAMP  
information on entering characters, see page 7-29.  
When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the  
character entry screen.  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
TEXT  
6 Select the pages to be printed on.  
If you wish to use one of the preset text  
sequences, touch the [RECALL] key. To  
directly enter the text, touch the [DIRECT  
ENTRY] key.  
3
4
Select whether to print  
CANCEL  
OK  
on only the first page,  
or all pages. The  
FIRST PAGE  
touched  
highlighted.  
key  
is  
ALL PAGES  
CANCEL  
OK  
TEXT  
DIRECT ENTRY  
FIRST PAGE  
5
PRE-SET  
ALL PAGES  
RECALL  
RE/DELETE  
DIRECT ENTRY  
7 Touch the [OK] key.  
If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a character  
entry screen will appear. For information on  
entering characters, see page 7-29. When  
finished, click the [OK] key to close the character  
entry screen. (Go to step 6.)  
CANCEL  
OK  
FIRSE  
ALL PAGES  
DIRECT ENTRY  
The stored text sequences will appear as  
keys. Touch the key of the desired text  
sequence.  
Continue from step 4 of "Common  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
CANCEL  
OK  
8
TEXT  
3
6
DIRECT ENTRY  
1/5  
RECALL  
No.04  
5  
No.06  
No.01 TARO YAMADA  
No.02 Meeting  
No.03  
NOTE  
To cancel a text setting...  
Touch the [CANCEL] key in the text print screen. (The  
screen of step 7.)  
The selected text sequence key is highlighted.  
If the desired text sequence key does not appear,  
change screens with the  
or  
key.  
The display is initially set to show 6 keys per  
screen. This can be changed to 3 keys per screen  
by touching the [3 6] key. When 3 keys are  
displayed, the entire text sequence will appear in  
each key. (When 6 keys are displayed, up to 22  
characters appear in each key.)  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SPECIAL MODES  
Storing text sequences  
Editing and deleting stored text  
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common  
Follow steps 1 and 2 of "Common  
1
1
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
operation procedure for using the print  
menu" (page 5-33).  
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.  
2 Touch the [TEXT] key.  
OK  
OK  
LAYOUT  
LAYOUT  
CANCEL  
OK  
CANCEL  
OK  
1/2  
1/2  
DATE  
STAMP  
DATE  
STAMP  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
TEXT  
TEXT  
3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
3 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
PRE-SET  
PRE-SET  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
Touch  
a
key that has not been  
Touch the text key that you wish to edit or  
delete.  
4
4
5
programmed (a key in which No. xx  
appears).  
TEXT  
3
6
BACK  
STORE/DELETE  
TEXT  
1/5  
No.04 Minutes of meeting  
No.01 TARO YAMADA  
3
6
BACK  
STORE/DELETE  
1/5  
No.02 Meeting  
No.03  
5  
No.06  
No.04  
No.05  
No.06  
No.01 TARO YAMADA  
No.02 Meeting  
No.03  
To edit the text, touch the [AMEND] key. To  
delete the text, touch the [DELETE] key.  
When touched, the character entry screen  
appears. Enter the text (max. 50 characters). For  
information on entering characters, see page 7-29.  
When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the  
character entry screen.  
When the [AMEND] key is  
touched, the character  
entry screen appears.  
The selected text  
sequence is entered. For  
information on entering  
characters, see page 7-  
A TEXT HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED TO  
LOCATION. CHANGE THE TEXT?  
If no free keys appear, change screens with the  
CANCEL  
DELETE  
No.06  
AMEND  
or  
key.  
5 Touch the [BACK] key.  
29. When finished, touch the [OK] key to close the  
character entry screen.  
If you touch the [DELETE] key, the text will be deleted  
and you will return to the screen of step 4.  
To cancel editing or deletion, touch the [CANCEL] key.  
The entered text is  
stored.  
3
6
BACK  
1/5  
04 Minutes of meeting  
05  
06  
6 Touch the [BACK] key.  
3
6
BACK  
1/5  
04 Minutes of meeting  
05  
06  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPECIAL MODES  
Checking and changing the print layout  
You can check the print layout after the print items have been selected. If needed you can change the print  
position or delete print content.  
Touch the [LAYOUT] key on the print menu  
screen.  
1
2
4 Touch the key of the new position.  
The selected key is  
OK  
highlighted and the  
SELECTED ITEM.  
LAYOUT  
OK  
CANCEL  
STAMP  
print position changes  
to the new position.  
1/  
PAGE  
NUMBERING  
TEXT  
The keys indicating the print position appear as  
follows depending on the state of the setting:  
Touch the key in which you wish to change  
the print position or delete print content.  
Print position without any set print  
menus.  
OK  
LAYOUT  
TARO YAMADA  
CONFIDENTIAL  
DO NOT COPY  
Currently set print position.  
Print position with another competing  
print menu set.  
1,2,3..  
(When moving a stamp, this indicates  
that another stamp has been set. When  
moving a print menu other than a stamp,  
this indicates that the date, page number,  
or text has been set.)  
NOTE  
Up to 14 characters of the print text appears in the  
key.  
5
To change the print position, touch the  
[MOVE] key. To delete print content, touch  
the [DELETE] key.  
3
NOTE  
If you wish to swap the contents of two positions,  
temporarily move the content of one position to an  
unused position and then complete the swap.  
If you touched the  
[MOVE] key, the new  
DO YOU WANT TO MOVE OR DELETE THE  
SELECTED ITEM?  
position  
selection  
screen appears.  
CANCEL  
DELETE  
MOVE  
1,..  
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
If you touched the  
[DELETE] key, the print  
content is deleted. (Go  
to step 6.)  
OK  
If you attempt to move  
print content to  
a
position that already  
has print content set, a  
message will appear  
asking you if you wish  
to  
overwrite  
the  
previously set content.  
To overwrite the content, touch the [YES] key. To  
cancel the move and return to the condition before  
the [OK] key was touched, touch the [NO] key.  
6 Touch the [OK] key.  
OK  
CONFIDENTIAL  
DO NOT COPY  
1,2,3..  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STORING, USING AND DELETING  
JOB PROGRAMS  
The steps of up to 10 copy jobs can be stored as job programs. Job programs can be called up with ease, and are  
retained even when the power is turned off. By storing frequently used copy settings in a job program, you can  
eliminate the bother of selecting the settings each time you use them for a copy job.  
If any settings related to the steps of a job program are changed in the administrator settings after the job program  
is stored, the steps related to the changed settings will not be included when the job program is called up.  
To exit the job programs mode, press the [CA] (clear all) key on the operation panel or touch the [EXIT] key on the  
touch panel.  
Storing a job program  
1 Press the [#/P] key.  
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
The selected settings  
will be stored in the  
number key selected in  
step 3.  
NCEL  
OK  
AUTO  
LOGOUT  
ORIGINAL  
AUTO  
2 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
M NUMBER.  
If a number key is selected in step 3 that has  
already been programmed.  
A setting confirmation screen will appear. To replace  
the existing program with the new program, touch  
the [STORE] key and continue from step 4. If you do  
not wish to replace the existing program, touch the  
[CANCEL] key to return to the screen of step 3 and  
select a different number key.  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
Touch the number key ([1] to [10]) in which  
you wish to stored the job program.  
Number keys in which  
3
PROGRAMS  
job  
already  
programs  
stored  
are  
are  
NOTE  
ESS PROGRAM NUMBER.  
If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been  
prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be  
possible to store or delete a job program. (See page  
17 of the administrator settings guide.)  
highlighted.  
RECALL  
STORE/  
Select the copy settings that you wish to  
store in the job program.  
4
The number of copies  
cannot be stored.  
TO STORE, MAKE SELECTIONS AND PRESS  
[OK], TO DELETE, PRESS [CANCEL].  
SPECIAL MODES  
2-SIDED COPY  
OUTPUT  
1.  
A4  
2.  
B5  
3.  
4. A3  
B4  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
STORING, USING AND DELETING JOB PROGRAMS  
Calling up a job program  
Set the number of copies if needed and  
then press the [START] key.  
1 Press the [#/P] key.  
3
Copying will begin using  
the settings of the job  
program.  
LOGOUT  
Touch the number key of the desired job  
program.  
2
JOB PROGRAMS  
The  
screen  
automatically closes and  
the job program is called  
up. A number key that  
does not have a job  
program cannot be  
selected.  
PRESS PROGRAM NUMBER.  
RECALL  
Deleting a stored job program  
5
1 Press the [#/P] key.  
4 Touch the [DELETE] key.  
The selected program is  
A JOB PROGRAM HAS BEEN ALREADY STORED  
IN THIS LOCATION.  
deleted and you return  
to the screen of step 3.  
To return to the screen of  
step 3 without deleting  
the job program, touch  
the [CANCEL] key. In  
both cases, touch the  
CANCEL  
RECALL  
DELETE  
STORE  
LOGOUT  
STORE/DELETE  
2 Touch the [STORE/DELETE] key.  
[EXIT] key on the screen displayed in the screen of  
step 3 to exit the job program mode.  
M NUMBER.  
NOTE  
If overwriting of programmed copy settings has been  
prohibited in the administrator settings, it will not be  
possible to store or delete a job program. (See page  
17 of the administrator settings guide.)  
RECALL  
STORE/DELETE  
Select a storage register number of the  
program to be deleted.  
3
EXIT  
If a number key for which  
no job program has been  
stored is selected, the  
screen will change to the  
screen of step 4 on the  
STORE/DELETE  
previous page for storing  
a job program.  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN  
The copy of the original scanned in interrupt mode is output before the remainder of the interrupted copy job.  
Place the original for the interrupt copy job  
in the document feeder or on the  
document glass (page 4-3).  
1 Touch the [INTERRUPT] key.  
2
If interrupt copying is  
INTERRUPT  
possible during a copy  
run, the [INTERRUPT]  
key will appear. (If the  
key does not appear,  
interrupt copying is not  
possible.)  
AUTO  
ORIGINA  
AUTO  
EXPOSUR  
2
3
A4  
CANCEL  
When the [INTERRUPT]  
key is touched in step 1,  
the [INTERRUPT] key  
will be replaced by the  
[CANCEL] key as shown  
in the illustration.  
0
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
ORIGINAL  
A
Select the exposure mode, paper size,  
number of copies, and any other copy  
settings as needed, and then press the  
[START] key.  
3
AUTO A4  
APER SELECT  
100%  
COPY RATIO  
To cancel an interrupt  
copy job while the interrupt original is being  
scanned or while you are selecting copy settings,  
touch the [CANCEL] key.  
NOTES  
If you touch the [INTERRUPT] key when auditing  
mode is enabled, the display will prompt you to  
enter your account number. Enter your account  
number with the numeric keys. The copies you  
make will be added to the count of the entered  
account number.  
The previous copy job automatically  
resumes after the interrupt job finishes.  
4
If a copy is being printed when the [INTERRUPT]  
key is pressed, interrupt mode will begin after the  
copy is finished.  
If the copy run to be interrupted is using paper  
from the bypass tray, the paper size and type of the  
bypass tray cannot be changed for use by the  
interrupt job.  
If the document glass is used for an interrupt copy  
job, two-sided copying, sort copying, and staple  
sort copying cannot be selected. If any of these  
functions are necessary, use the document feeder.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CHAPTER 6  
MACHINE MAINTENANCE  
(FOR COPYING)  
This chapter explains procedures for cleaning the machine, and  
troubleshooting.  
Page  
USER MAINTENANCE........................................................................... 6-2  
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 6-3  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
USER MAINTENANCE  
To ensure good service from this product over a long period of time, it is recommended that the following  
maintenance procedures be performed on a regular basis.  
CAUTION  
Do not use flammable spray to clean the machine. If gas from the spray comes in contact with hot electrical  
components or the fusing unit inside the machine, fire or electrical shock may result.  
NOTE  
When cleaning, do not use thinner, benzene, or similar volatile cleaning agents.  
Cleaning the document glass and the automatic document  
feeder  
If the document glass, document cover or automatic document scanning unit have dirty spots, these spots will form  
lines in scanned images. These will show up as defects when the images are printed. Always keep these parts clean.  
Wipe with a clean, soft cloth. If necessary, moisten the  
cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent.  
When finished, wipe dry with a clean cloth.  
If black or white stripes  
appear  
on  
printed  
images of originals that  
were fed through the  
automatic  
document  
feeder, wipe the long  
narrow glasses in the  
in the illustration).  
scanning unit ( and  
Example of dirty print image  
Black stripes  
White stripes  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
TROUBLESHOOTING  
Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user. If you  
are unable to solve the problem by checking the list, turn off the main power switch and the power switch, and unplug  
the power cord.  
Problems related to the copy function are described below. For problems related to general use of the machine, see  
page 2-32.  
Problem  
Check  
Solution  
Machine does not Is the [START] key indicator off?  
operate.  
This indicates that the machine is warming  
up (warming up lasts no more than 120  
seconds after the power switch is turned on).  
Copying is not possible during this time. Wait  
until the [START] key light illuminates.  
Copies are too dark Is the original image too dark or too light?  
or too light.  
Select an appropriate exposure mode for the  
original being copied and adjust the copy  
exposure. (See page 4-14.)  
Is the exposure mode set to "AUTO"?  
The exposure level for "AUTO" can be  
adjusted using "Exposure adjustment" in the  
administrator settings. Contact your  
administrator. (See page 16 of the  
administrator settings guide.)  
An appropriate exposure mode for the Change the exposure mode to "AUTO" or  
original has not been selected.  
manually select an appropriate resolution  
setting. (See page 4-14.)  
Text is not clear on a An appropriate exposure mode for the Change the exposure mode to "TEXT". (See  
copy.  
original has not been selected.  
page 4-14.)  
Smudges appear on Document glass or document cover dirty?  
copies.  
Clean regularly. (See page 6-2.)  
Black lines appear on copies when the Clean the original scanning area. (See page  
automatic document feeding function is 6-2.)  
used.  
Original smudged or blotchy?  
Use a clean original.  
6
Image cannot be Is the auto paper select or auto image Rotation copy functions only if the machine  
rotated.  
Part of  
function selected?  
is either in the auto paper select mode or in  
the auto image mode. (See page 4-15.)  
original Is the original positioned correctly?  
Set the original properly. (See page 4-3.)  
image is not copied.  
Is the copy ratio proper for the original and Use the auto image function to select the  
paper sizes?  
appropriate copy ratio based on the original  
and copy sizes. (See page 4-15.)  
Blank copies  
Is the original placed correctly?  
When using the document glass, place the  
original face down.  
When using the automatic document feeder,  
place original face up. (See page 4-3.)  
Order of copies Is the order of originals correct?  
incorrect  
When using the document glass, place the  
originals from the first page one sheet at a  
time.  
When using the automatic document feeder,  
place the originals with the first page up.  
Job  
needed  
cancellation Is a message requesting cancellation of job Press the [CA] key to cancel the current job.  
displayed?  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 7  
DOCUMENT FILING  
FUNCTION  
Page  
OVERVIEW............................................................................................. 7-2  
Document filing function.................................................................. 7-2  
TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION..................................... 7-4  
A look at the operation panel .......................................................... 7-4  
Saving files...................................................................................... 7-4  
Main screen of document filing ....................................................... 7-5  
Document filing icons...................................................................... 7-5  
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE .................................................... 7-6  
Quick File ........................................................................................ 7-6  
Filing................................................................................................ 7-7  
Print jobs......................................................................................... 7-9  
Scan Save....................................................................................... 7-10  
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE.......................................................... 7-13  
Searching for and calling up a saved file......................................... 7-13  
Calling up and using a saved file..................................................... 7-15  
SYSTEM SETTINGS .............................................................................. 7-24  
ENTERING CHARACTERS.................................................................... 7-29  
TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................ 7-31  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
OVERVIEW  
Document filing function  
The document filing function allows you to save a document image in the machine's hard disk as a data file. The  
image can be called up and printed or transmitted as needed.  
The scanned document image is saved when printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or  
image send mode ("QUICK FILE" or "FILE"). A document can also be scanned and saved without being printed,  
copied, or transmitted ("scan save").  
To allow you to search for the file and call it up, names (user name, file name, etc.) can be assigned to the file (except  
when using Quick File).  
Data flow  
Printing in copy mode (Quick  
File saving, page 7-6)  
Machine hard disk  
Printing from a computer (printer  
data, page 7-9)  
Print  
Call up a saved  
file to reuse it.  
Save to machine's  
hard disk  
Transmission in fax/image send  
mode (filing, page 7-7)  
HDD  
Send  
(facsimile or image send  
function must be required)  
and  
Scanning a document only  
(scan save, page 7-10)  
Machine hard disk  
QUICK FILE FOLDER  
Data is saved by job  
MAIN FOLDER  
CUSTOM FOLDER  
A user name and file name can  
be specified for each file and  
the file saved to a folder with  
any desired name assigned.  
A user name and file name is  
specified for each saved job  
A password  
Folder 1  
A password  
can be set  
File 1  
File 2  
File 1  
File 2  
can be set  
Folder 2  
A password  
can be set  
Folder 3  
File 1  
File 2  
A stored file can be moved to a different folder under certain conditions (page 7-22).  
7-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
OVERVIEW  
Quick File folder  
When [QUICK FILE FOLDER] is selected in the main screen of any of the modes, the file is saved in this folder.  
Up to 1000 files can be saved in the Quick File folder. All files in the Quick File Folder can be deleted using the  
administrator settings. If you have a file that you do not want deleted, set the file attribute to [PROTECT] (up to 500  
files can be protected). (See [Property change] on page 7-21)  
The following user and file names are automatically assigned (the names cannot be selected):  
User name : User unknown  
File name (example) : COPY_04042010_113050AM (job mode and month, day, year, hour, minute, second, AM/  
PM of save). (In the example, the file was saved on 4/4/2010 at 11:30 and 50 sec in copy mode.)  
When saved, jobs are classified by mode. A saved job can be called up from the COMPLETE job status screen.  
Main folder  
When saving a file, a previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and  
any file name can be assigned.  
A password can also be set for a saved file ([CONFIDENTIAL] save). (See [Property change] on page 7-21.)  
If a user name and file name are not selected, a name in the same format as Quick File is automatically assigned.  
Custom folder  
Up to 500 folders (named as desired) can be created in this folder. When saving a file in one of these folders, a  
previously stored user name (see [SYSTEM SETTINGS] on page 7-24) can be specified and any file name can be  
assigned.  
A password can be set for a file saved in one of these folders.  
Attributes of saved files  
The protect setting can be selected for files saved with the document filing function. This prevents a file from being  
moved or automatically or manually deleted.  
Three attributes are available for saved files: [SHARING], [PROTECT], and [CONFIDENTIAL]. When saved with  
the [SHARING] attribute, a file is not protected. When saved with the [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, a  
file is protected.  
Files saved to the Quick File folder are all [SHARING]. When saving a file to the main folder or a custom folder,  
[SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] can be selected.  
A [SHARING] file can be changed to a [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL] file using [Property change] (page 7-21).  
A password is set for a [CONFIDENTIAL] file to protect it. (The password must be entered to call up the file.)  
A password cannot be set for a [PROTECT] file, however, as long as the file is not changed to [SHARING] with  
[PROPERTY CHANGE], the file will be protected.  
CAUTION  
7
Documents saved with [QUICK FILE] are shared files that can be called up by anyone and printed or transmitted. For this  
reason, do not use Quick File for sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be reused by others.  
When saving a document with [FILE], set the attribute to [CONFIDENTIAL] and set a password to prevent others from  
reusing the document.  
Even when a file is saved with the [CONFIDENTIAL] attribute, the attribute can be changed afterward to [SHARING] using  
[Property change] (page 7-21). For this reason, do not save sensitive documents or documents that you do not want to be  
reused by others.  
Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the  
leaking of sensitive information due to 1) manipulation by a third party of any data saved using the Quick File function or  
filing function, or 2) incorrect operation of the Quick File function or filing function by the operator that saves the data.  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION  
A look at the operation panel  
PRINT  
READY  
DOCUMENT  
DATA  
FILING  
LINE  
IMAGE SEND  
DATA  
COPY  
SYSTEM  
JOB STATUS SETTINGS  
LOGOUT  
1
4
5
Touch panel (see the next page)  
Numeric keys  
This displays messages and keys. Keys can be  
touched to select and enter settings.  
Use these keys to enter a password or a numeric  
value for a setting.  
When a key is touched, a beep will sound and the  
key will be highlighted to indicate that it is selected.  
When a key cannot be selected in a screen, it will  
be greyed out. If touched, a warning beep will  
sound to alert you that it cannot be selected.  
[C] key (Clear key)  
Use this key if you make a mistake when entering a  
password or numeric setting.  
This key is also used to cancel scanning of a  
document.  
2
3
Mode select keys  
6
7
[CA] key (Clear all key)  
Use this key to select the mode.  
Use this key to cancel a setting procedure and  
return to the main screen. The key is also used to  
cancel a special function.  
[DOCUMENT FILING] key  
Touch this key to display the main screen of  
document filing mode.  
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key  
Use this key to store, edit or delete a user name or  
custom folder.  
Saving files  
To save files to the main folder or custom folders, a user name must be previously stored. To create a folder in the  
custom folder, the folder name must be stored. These settings are configured in the system settings.  
7-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
TO USE THE DOCUMENT FILING FUNCTION  
Main screen of document filing  
Document filing icons  
To display the main screen of document filing, press  
the [DOCUMENT FILING] key when the touch panel  
shows the copy mode screen, image send mode, or the  
job status screen.  
Main  
icon  
Icon of  
confidential protected  
file or folder file  
Icon of  
Meaning  
The main screen shows messages, keys, and items  
that can be selected for document filing.  
Folder  
Copy job file  
FILE STORE  
SCAN TO HDD  
FILE RETRIEVE  
Print job file  
(including direct  
print jobs)  
FILE  
FOLDER  
QUICK FILE  
FOLDER  
Fax transmission  
job file  
SEARCH  
GLOBAL ACCESS  
HDD STATUS  
PC-FAX  
transmission job  
file  
1
2
Message display  
Displays messages.  
Internet  
fax  
[SCAN TO HDD] key  
transmission job  
file  
Touch to select scan save. Scan save is used to  
save the image file of a scanned document in the  
main folder or a custom folder without printing or  
transmitting the document.  
PC-Internet fax  
transmission job  
file  
3
4
[FILE FOLDER] key  
Touch to call up a file from the main folder or the  
custom folder. When the key is touched, the files in  
the main folder or the folders in the custom folder  
appear.  
Scan save file  
E-mail  
transmission job  
file  
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key  
Touch to call up a file from the Quick File folder.  
When the key is touched, the files in the Quick File  
folder appear.  
FTP  
transmission job  
file  
5
6
[SEARCH] key  
Touch to search for a file by user name, file name,  
or folder name.  
Desktop  
transmission job  
file  
7
[HDD STATUS] key  
Touch to check the use of the machine's hard disk.  
Network Folder  
transmission job  
file  
The following icons may appear added to a main icon  
or alone.  
Icon  
Meaning  
Confidential file or folder  
Protected file  
NOTE  
When the file of a job that was saved using scan save  
is printed in job settings, the icon of the job is  
highlighted.  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
Quick File  
When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or fax/image transmission mode,"QUICK  
FILE" can be selected to save an image of the document to the Quick File folder.  
The image can be called up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate  
the original.  
NOTE  
As an example, the procedure for saving a document to the Quick File folder while copying using the automatic  
document feeding function is explained below.  
Place the original in the document feeder  
and select resolution and exposure  
settings.  
The saved image can be called up from the  
Quick File folder or the job status screen.  
1
2
4
AUTO  
To call the image up from the Quick File folder,  
To call the job up from the finished job status  
See steps 1 to 8 of  
pages 4-7 to 4-8 and  
ORIGINAL  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
14.  
A4  
AUTO  
The following operations can be  
performed on the image that was called up  
in step 4.  
5
Touch the [QUICK FILE] key in the main  
screen.  
Print the image (page 7-17)  
The [QUICK FILE] key  
Transmit the image (page 7-20)  
Change the attribute (page 7-21)  
Move the image (page 7-22)  
Delete the image (page 7-22)  
Check details on the image (page 7-22)  
will be highlighted to  
indicate that the function  
FILE  
is selected.  
If the [FILE] key is  
QUICK FILE  
greyed out, only the  
[QUICK FILE] key can  
be selected.  
When you touch the [QUICK FILE] key, a message  
asking you to confirm the save will appear. Touch  
the [OK] key in the message screen and go to the  
next step.  
If you wish to cancel the save, touch the [QUICK  
FILE] key after touching the [OK] key so that the  
[QUICK FILE] key is no longer highlighted.  
Press the [START] key on the operation  
panel.  
3
To prevent accidental  
saving of the document,  
the  
SCANNED DATA IS  
STORED IN THE  
warning  
"THE  
QUICK FILE FOLDER."  
appears for 6 seconds  
after the [START] key is pressed.  
When copying begins, the image is saved.  
7-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
Filing  
When printing or transmitting a document in copy mode, printer mode, or image send mode, "FILE" can be selected  
to save an image of the document to the main folder or a previously created custom folder. The image can be called  
up at a later time, allowing you to print or transmit the document without having to locate the original.  
NOTE  
As an example, the procedure for using the filing function while copying using the automatic document feeding  
function is explained below.  
Place the original in the document feeder  
and select resolution and exposure  
1
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
The touched user name is selected and you return to the  
screen of step 3. The selected user name appears.  
settings.  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
See steps 1 to 8 of  
pages 4-7 to 4-8 and  
NOTE  
If you do not select a user name, the following name  
is automatically selected:  
Example : User unknown  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
14.  
A4  
AUTO  
6 Touch the [FILE NAME] key.  
USER NAME  
FILE NAME  
STORETO:  
A character entry screen  
appears. Enter a file  
name (maximum of 30  
characters). (See page  
2 Touch the [FILE] key in the main screen.  
COPY  
MAI  
An information entry  
screen appears.  
to  
enter  
FILE  
characters.)  
QUICK ILE  
NOTE  
If you do not enter a file name, a file name in the  
following format is automatically assigned:  
Auto generated file name : Month, day, year, hour,  
minute, second, AM/PM  
3 Touch the [USER NAME] key.  
(Example : COPY_04042010_113050AM)  
CONFIDENTIAL  
7 Touch the [STORED TO:] key.  
USER NAME  
USER NAME  
FILE ME  
COPY  
MAI  
7
COPY  
MAIN  
FILE NAME  
STORED TO:  
STORED TO:  
Touch the desired user name in the list of  
user names that appears.  
4
1/1  
Suzuki  
Sasaki  
Hasegawa  
Nakata  
Touch the desired folder name in the list of  
folder names that appears  
8
Ono  
Yamada  
ALL USERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
CUSTOM FOLDER 1  
CUSTOM FOLDER 3  
CUSTOM FOLDER 5  
CUSTOM FOLDER 7  
CUSTOM FOLDER 2  
CUSTOM FOLDER 4  
CUSTOM FOLDER 6  
CUSTOM FOLDER 8  
1/2  
User names must be previously stored  
ALL FOLDERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRS  
UVWXY  
Folder names must be previously stored.  
password has been set for the folder, a password  
entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit  
password for the folder.  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
You will return to the screen of step 4. The  
set password is displayed with " ".  
9 Touch the [OK] key.  
14  
The touched folder is  
FOLDER  
selected and you return  
to the screen of step 5.  
The selected folder  
name is displayed.  
OK  
OK  
CANCEL  
PASSWORD  
2/2  
XYYY  
If needed, select the [CONFIDENTIAL]  
checkbox (only in copy mode).  
When this is selected, the  
15Touch the [OK] key.  
10  
You will return to the main screen.  
file is stored with the  
attribute [CONFIDENTIAL].  
To call up the file, the  
password that will be set in  
the following steps must be  
entered.  
FILE INFORMATION  
Press the [START] key on the operation  
panel.  
16  
CONFIDENTIAL  
When copying begins,  
the image is saved.  
ER NAME  
FILE NAME  
If you selected the [CONFIDENTIAL]  
checkbox, touch the [PASSWORD] key and  
enter a password.  
If you did not select the [CONFIDENTIAL]  
checkbox, go to step 16. The file will be saved  
as a [SHARING] file.  
The saved image can be called up using  
17  
the file name, folder name, or user name,  
or from the filing folder.  
11Touch the [PASSWORD] key.  
To call up the image by entering the file name,  
folder name, or user name, see "Searching for  
To call up the image from the filing folder, see  
15.  
The password entry  
screen appears.  
CAN  
PASSWORD  
XYYY  
The following operations can be  
18  
performed on the image that was called  
up:  
Enter a 5-digit password with the numeric  
keys.  
12  
As each digit is entered,  
Print the image (page 7-17)  
"
-" changes to " ".  
CANCEL  
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.  
Transmit the image (page 7-20)  
Change the attribute (page 7-21)  
Move the image (page 7-22)  
Delete the image (page 7-22)  
Check details on the image (page 7-22)  
13Touch the [OK] key.  
0
CANCEL  
OK  
10-KEY PAD.  
7-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
Print jobs  
Print jobs sent to the machine using the machine's  
printer driver can be saved in the main folder or a  
previously created custom folder when printed. The  
saved print data can be called up and printed or  
transmitted without having to open the original file on  
your computer.  
Touch the key of the folder that contains  
the desired file.  
3
4
CUSTOM FOLDER  
MAIN FOLDER  
If a password is set for  
the selected folder, a  
password entry screen  
will appear. Enter the 5-  
digit password with the  
numeric keys.  
CUSTOM FOLDER 1  
CUSTOM FOLDER 3  
CUSTOM FOLDER 5  
CUSTOM FOLDER 7  
CUSTO  
CUSTO  
CUSTO  
CUSTO  
This section gives an overview of this function and  
explains the procedure for printing from the operation  
panel of the machine.  
For the procedures that are performed at your  
computer when initiating printing such as selecting the  
save location and file attribute, see the printer driver  
Help file.  
ALL FOLDERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN OPQRS  
Touch the printer icon ( ) tab and then  
touch the key of the desired file.  
CUSTOM FOLDER  
SEARCH  
BACK  
MAIN FOLDER  
FILE NAME  
Basic  
USER NAME  
DATE  
1
1
2003/10/01  
2003/10/01  
2003/10/01  
Yamada  
Sato  
Using a print job file (printing,  
presentation  
Product  
deleting, transmitting, etc.)  
Akata  
PRINTS  
BATCH P.  
Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the  
operation panel.  
1
The following screen appears if the [QUICK FILE  
FOLDER] key is touched in step 2.  
PRINT  
READY  
DOCUMENT  
DATA  
FILING  
SEARCH  
BACK  
QUICK FILE FOLDER  
FILE NAME  
LINE  
IMAGE SEND  
DATA  
USER NAME  
DATE  
1
1
2003/10/01  
2003/10/01  
Tanaka7890123456  
Suzuki7890123456  
User unknown  
User unknown  
COPY  
SYSTEM  
PRINTS  
BATCH P.  
Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the  
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on  
where the file is saved.  
2
Touch the key of the file that you wish to call up. A  
menu screen will appear.  
If a password is set for the file, a password entry  
screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with  
the numeric keys.  
FILE RETRIEVE  
FILE  
FOLDER  
QUICK FILE  
FOLDER  
Touch the key of the operation that you  
wish to perform.  
5
7
SEARCH  
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
HDD STATUS  
CANCEL  
JOB SETTINGS  
Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is  
saved in the main folder or the custom folder.  
Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the  
file is saved in the Quick File folder.  
Basic specifications  
SELECT THE JOB.  
PRINT  
Yamada Taro  
A4  
PROPERTY  
CHANGE  
SEND  
MOVE  
DELETE  
DETAIL  
If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the  
files in the main folder or the folders in the  
custom folder appear. If you open the wrong  
folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the  
[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the  
correct folder.  
If the desired file is saved in the main folder,  
go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a  
custom folder, go to step 3.  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17)  
(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)  
(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)  
(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22)  
(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22)  
(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22)  
If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]  
key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.  
Go to step 4.  
The setting screen of the selected operation  
appears. See the indicated page.  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
Scan Save  
Scan save is used to save a scanned document image in the main folder or the custom folder without copying or transmitting it.  
Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the  
operation panel.  
Perform any of the following steps 7 to 16  
as needed. When finished, go to step 17 on  
page 7-11.  
1
6
PRINT  
READY  
DOCUMENT  
FILING  
DATA  
To set the original size, perform steps 7 to 10.  
To set the resolution, perform steps 11 to 13  
LINE  
DATA  
IMAGE SEND  
COPY  
on page 7-11  
To select the exposure, perform steps 14 to 16  
on page 7-11  
.
SYSTEM  
.
If you no not wish to select any of the above  
settings, go to step 17 on page 7-11.  
2 Touch the [SCAN TO HDD] key.  
FILE STORE  
7 Touch the [ORIGINAL] key.  
SCAN TO HDD  
300x300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
3 Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key.  
special  
Select  
any  
functions that you wish  
to use (otherwise skip  
this step).  
To set the original size, see "Manually  
SPECIAL MODES  
8
INFOTION  
When the [SPECIAL  
MODES] key is touched,  
If the original is two-sided, touch the [2-  
SIDED BOOKLET] key or the [2-SIDED  
TABLET] key depending on where the  
pages are bound.  
9
the  
special  
modes  
selection screen appears. (See "Using special  
SCAN SIZE  
AUTO  
STORE SIZ  
AUTO  
NOTE  
100%  
For explanations of the special functions, see page  
7-12 and chapter 5.  
2-SIDED  
BOOKLET  
2-SIDED  
TABLET  
4 Touch the [FILE INFORMATION] key.  
SPECIAL MODES  
10Touch the [OK] key.  
FILE  
INFORMATION  
You will return to the  
screen of step 7.  
OK  
STORE SIZE  
AUTO  
The screens for selecting the user name, file  
name, folder, and attribute appear. Configure the  
settings as explained in step 3 to step 15 on  
pages 7-7 to 7-8. When step 15 is completed, you  
will return to the main screen of document filing.  
5
IDED  
NOTE  
FILE RETRIEVE  
FILE STORE  
If the original pages are bound at the side, the  
document is a "booklet". If the original pages are  
bound at the top, the document is a "tablet".  
FILE  
FOLDER  
SCAN TO HDD  
QUICK FILE  
FOLDER  
SEARCH  
GLOBAL ACCESS  
HDD STATUS  
7-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
11Touch the [RESOLUTION] key.  
16Touch the [OK] key.  
You will return to the  
screen of step 14.  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
OK  
300x300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
MANUAL  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
Place the original and touch the [START]  
key.  
12Touch the key of the desired resolution.  
17  
PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.  
[Placing the original]  
For information on placing the original, see  
"NORMAL COPYING" in chapter 4.  
If you selected the "Card Shot" special function,  
the document glass must be used.  
SCAN TO HDD  
OK  
200x200dpi  
300x300dpi  
400x400dpi  
600x600dpi  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
RESOLUTION  
HALF TONE  
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
If you selected job build mode, the automatic  
document feeding function must be used.  
Select one of four resolution levels as appropriate  
for the original.  
The selected resolution key is highlighted.  
Scanning begins.  
If you are using the  
document glass, touch  
the [READ-END] key  
after all pages have  
been scanned.  
13Touch the [OK] key.  
You will return to the  
screen of step 11.  
OK  
NOTE  
This completes the scan save procedure. Follow the  
steps below when you wish to call up the image and  
print or transmit it.  
HALF TONE  
14Touch the [EXPOSURE] key.  
The saved image can be called up using  
18  
the file name, folder name, or user name,  
or from the filing folder.  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
To call up the image by entering the file name,  
folder name, or user name, see "Searching for  
To call up the image from the filing folder, see  
15.  
300x300d
RESOLUTION  
7
AUTO  
ORIGINAL  
15Select [AUTO] or [MANUAL].  
The following operations can be  
19  
To have the exposure  
adjusted automatically,  
select [AUTO].  
AUTO  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
performed on the image that was called up  
in step 18:  
Print the image (page 7-17)  
Transmit the image (page 7-20)  
Change the attribute ((page 7-21)  
Move the image (page 7-22)  
Delete the image (page 7-22)  
Check details on the image (page 7-22)  
If  
[MANUAL], touch the  
or key to adjust  
you  
selected  
MANUAL  
the exposure.  
(For a darker image, touch  
the  
key. For a lighter  
key.)  
image, touch the  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SAVING A DOCUMENT IMAGE FILE  
Using special functions for scan save  
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES] key in the main scan save screen to display the special modes screen.  
The functions below can be selected in this screen.  
Touch the [SPECIAL MODES]  
key in the main screen.  
READY TO SCAN TO HDD.  
PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.  
SCAN TO HDD  
BACK  
AUTO  
EXPOSURE  
300x300dpi  
RESOLUTION  
SPECIAL MODES  
FILE  
AUTO  
INFORMATION  
ORIGINAL  
[READY TO SCAN TO HDD.  
PRESS [START] TO SCAN ORIGINAL.  
OK  
SPECIAL MODES  
DUAL PAGE  
SCAN  
1 2  
ERASE  
2in1  
JOB  
BUILD  
CARD SHOT  
1
2
4
5
[ERASE] key (see page 5-4)  
[JOB BUILD] key (see page 5-8)  
Use this function to erase shadows that can appear  
around the edges of the image when books and  
other thick originals are scanned.  
When you have more pages than can be placed in  
the document feeder at once, this function allows  
you to scan the pages in sets.  
[DUAL PAGE SCAN] key (see page 5-5)  
[CARD SHOT] key (see page 5-29)  
(Equivalent to Dual page copy in copy mode)  
This function allows you to save the front and back  
side of a card on a single page (instead of saving  
each side as a separate file).  
This function is used to save the opened pages of  
a book in order one page at a time (left page then  
right page).  
3
[2in1] key (see page 5-24  
)
(When the fax or image send function is installed,  
this corresponds to the 2in1 function explained in  
the fax and network scanner manuals. This also  
corresponds to the "Multishot" function in copy  
mode, however, only "2in1" is possible for scan  
save. )  
This function reduces two original pages and  
arranges the images on a single page in a uniform  
layout.  
7-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
Searching for and calling up a saved file  
When calling up a file, you can enter the file name, folder name, or user name to quickly search for the file.  
To search for a file, touch the [SEARCH] key in the main screen of document filing mode or in a screen that shows  
folders or files in a folder. A data search screen will appear.  
Procedure for searching for a file  
Touch the [SEARCH] key in the main  
screen of document filing mode or in a  
screen that shows folders or files in a  
folder.  
Touch the one-touch key of the user name  
that you wish to use to search for the file.  
If you wish to directly enter the user name,  
touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key.  
1
4
SEARCH  
If  
you  
touch  
the  
FILE  
CANCEL  
OK  
SELECT USER NAME.  
Suzuki  
[SEARCH] key in the  
screen that shows the  
folders in the custom  
folder or a screen that  
shows the files in a  
folder, the [SEARCH  
FOLDER  
Sasaki  
Nakata  
Yamada  
Hasegawa  
Ono  
SEARCH  
DIRECT ENTRY  
HDD ATUS  
ALL USERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
The selected user name is highlighted.  
If you select the wrong user name, touch the  
key of the correct name.  
WITHIN CURRENT FOLDER] checkbox will  
appear. Select this checkbox to search for a file  
only in the selected folder.  
If you touch the [DIRECT ENTRY] key, a  
character entry screen will appear. Enter the  
user name.  
See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering  
characters.  
In the data search screen, select whether  
you will search by [USER NAME] or [FILE  
OR FOLDER NAME].  
2
START SEARCH  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
USER NAME  
FILE OR FOLDER NAME  
You will return to the  
screen of step 2 and the  
selected user name will  
appear.  
CANCEL  
OK  
To search by user name, follow steps 3 to 6.  
To search by file name or folder name,  
perform step 8.  
DIRECT ENTRY  
To stop searching, touch the [CANCEL]key.  
7
6 Touch the [START SEARCH] key.  
[Searching by user name]  
START SEARCH  
CANCEL  
3 Touch the [USER NAME] key.  
START SEARCH  
CANCEL  
SEARCH  
USER NAME  
FILE OR FOLDER N
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
The results of the user name search  
appear. Touch the desired file name or  
folder name.  
The results of the file or folder name  
search appear. Touch the desired file  
name or folder name.  
7
10  
CANCEL  
SEARCH AGAIN  
CANCEL  
SEARCH AGAIN  
SEARCH  
SEARCH  
DATE  
DATE  
FILE OR FOLDER NAME  
USER NAME  
AAA  
FILE OR FOLDER NAME  
USER NAME  
Product SpecA  
Product B  
2003/10/20  
2003/10/20  
2003/10/20  
Product specifications  
Products  
Yamada  
Sato  
2002/12/30  
2002/12/30  
AAA  
AAA  
Product 2  
Product_info  
Akata  
See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing  
icons.  
See page 7-5 for a list of the document filing  
icons.  
When a file name is touched, the operation  
selection screen appears. (To perform an  
operation using the file, go to step 5 on  
page 7-16.)  
When a file name is touched, the operation  
selection screen appears. (To perform an  
operation using the file, go to step 5 on  
page 7-16.)  
When a folder name is touched, all files in the  
folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.  
(To perform an operation using the file, go  
to step 5 on page 7-16.)  
When a folder name is touched, all files in the  
folder are displayed. Touch the desired file.  
(To perform an operation using the file, go  
to step 5 on page 7-16.)  
To change the order of file display, touch the  
[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER  
NAME] key, or [DATE] key.  
To change the order of file display, touch the  
[FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key, [USER  
NAME] key, or [DATE] key.  
If you touch a file name or folder name that  
has a password, a password entry screen will  
appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the  
numeric keys.  
If you touch a file name or folder name that  
has a password, a password entry screen will  
appear. Enter the 5-digit password with the  
numeric keys.  
[Searching by file or folder name]  
8 Touch the [FILE OR FOLDER NAME] key.  
A character entry screen  
USER NAME  
appears. Enter the file  
FILE OR FOLDER NAME  
name or folder name to  
be used for the search.  
See page 7-29 to enter  
characters.  
9 Touch the [START SEARCH] key.  
START SEARCH  
CANCEL  
7-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
Calling up and using a saved file  
A file saved with the document filing function can be called up and printed or manipulated as needed.  
The following operations can be performed:  
[Print] : Print the file (page 7-17).  
[Send] : Transmit the saved file (page 7-20). The file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to  
Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax. (All of these methods require installation of the appropriate options.)  
[Property change] : Change the attribute of the saved file (page 7-21).  
[Move] : Move the file (page 7-22).  
[Delete] : Delete the file (page 7-22).  
[Detail] : Show details on the saved file (page 7-22).  
General procedure for using a saved file  
Press the [DOCUMENT FILING] key on the  
operation panel.  
Touch the key of the folder that contains  
the desired file.  
1
3
PRINT  
CUSTOM FOLDER  
MAIN FOLDER  
SEARCH  
BACK  
READY  
DOCUMENT  
FILING  
DATA  
CUSTOM FOLDER 1  
CUSTOM FOLDER 3  
CUSTOM FOLDER 5  
CUSTOM FOLDER 7  
CUSTOM FOLDER 2  
1/1  
CUSTOM FOLDER 4  
CUSTOM FOLDER 6  
CUSTOM FOLDER 8  
LINE  
DATA  
IMAGE SEND  
COPY  
ALL FOLDERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ  
SYSTEM  
If there are more custom folder keys than can  
Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key or the  
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key depending on  
where the file is saved.  
appear in one screen, touch the  
to change screens.  
or  
keys  
2
If a password is set for the selected folder, a  
password entry screen will appear. Enter the 5-  
digit password with the numeric keys.  
FILE RETRIEVE  
FILE  
FOLDER  
4 Touch the desired file key.  
QUICK FILE  
FOLDER  
CUSTOM FOLDER  
SEARCH  
DATE  
BACK  
MAIN FOLDER  
SEARCH  
FILE NAME  
USER NAME  
1
1
HDD STATUS  
2003/10/20  
2003/10/20  
2003/10/20  
Basic specifications  
Yamada  
Sato  
presentaion_0903  
Touch the [FILE FOLDER] key if the file is  
saved in the main folder or the custom folder.  
Touch the [QUICK FILE FOLDER] key if the  
file is saved in the Quick File folder.  
If you touched the [FILE FOLDER] key, the  
files in the main folder or the folders in the  
custom folder appear. If you open the wrong  
folder, touch the [MAIN FOLDER] key or the  
[CUSTOM FOLDER] key and open the  
correct folder.  
Product_info  
COPY  
Akata  
BATCH P.  
7
Touch the key of the file that you wish to use.  
(Parts of the screen that are framed in black are  
keys that can be touched.)  
A menu screen will appear.  
If a password is set for the file, a password entry  
screen will appear. Enter the 5-digit password with  
the numeric keys.  
If the desired file is saved in the main folder,  
go to step 4. If the desired file is saved in a  
custom folder, go to step 3.  
If you touched the [QUICK FILE FOLDER]  
key, the files in the Quick File folder appear.  
Go to step 4.  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
(1) [PRINT] key (see page 7-17)  
(2) [SEND] key (see page 7-20)  
Touch the key of the operation that you  
wish to perform.  
5
(1)  
(2)  
(3)  
(3) [PROPERTY CHANGE] key (see page 7-21)  
(4) [MOVE] key (see page 7-22)  
CANCEL  
JOB SETTINGS  
Basic specifications  
SELECT THE JOB.  
PRINT  
Yamada Taro  
A4  
(5) [DELETE] key (see page 7-22)  
(6) [DETAIL] key (see page 7-22)  
PROPERTY  
CHANGE  
SEND  
The setting screen of the selected operation  
appears. See the indicated page.  
MOVE  
DELETE  
DETAIL  
(4)  
(5)  
(6)  
FILE SELECTION SCREEN  
The file selection screen of the Quick File folder, Main folder, and custom folders is explained below.  
CUSTOM FOLDER  
USER NAME  
SEARCH  
BACK  
MAIN FOLDER  
FILE NAME  
DATE  
1
3
Basic specifications  
Yamada  
Sato  
2006/10/20  
2006/10/20  
2006/10/20  
Products  
Product_info  
ALL FILES  
Akata  
BATCH P.  
1
3
4
File keys  
[Back] key  
The stored files are displayed. An icon showing  
which mode the file was stored from, the file name,  
the user name, and the date the file was stored  
appear in each file key.  
When a file is touched, the job setting screen  
appears.  
Touch this key to return to the screen one level up.  
Select displayed files by job type.  
You can select the file keys that are displayed by  
job type.  
[ALL FILES] is initially selected.  
Touch a tab to show a list of the files that were  
stored from that mode.  
2
[File Name] key, [User Name] key, [Date] key  
Use these keys to change the order of display of  
the file keys. When one of the keys is touched,  
5
[Batch Print] key  
or  
appears in the key.  
appears in the [File Name] key or [User  
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user  
name in ascending order.  
Touch this key to print all files in a folder.  
For detailed information on batch printing, see 7-  
When  
When  
appear in order from the oldest date.  
When appears in the [File Name] key or [User  
appears in the [Date] key, the files  
Name] key, the files appear by file name or user  
name in descending order.  
When  
appears in the [Date] key, the files  
appear in order from the most recent date.  
7-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
[Print]  
A saved file can be printed.  
The screen below appears when the [PRINT] key is selected in the operation selection screen. To begin printing,  
7
touch the [PRINT] ( ) key. Printing settings can be selected in this screen before printing. The settings that were  
in effect when the file was saved appear initially. The settings can be changed as needed.  
NOTES  
When print settings are changed with this procedure, only the value for the number of copies is overwritten.  
The printing speed will be slower for image files saved using certain resolution settings. (See page 7-31.)  
CANCEL  
JOB SETTINGS / PRINT  
A4  
Basic specifications  
AUTO  
Yamada Taro  
NUMBER OF PRINTS  
PAPER SELECT  
PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA  
PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA  
(1~999)  
OUTPUT  
1
2-SIDED  
TANDEM PRINT  
1
2
4
[PAPER SELECT] key  
[TANDEM PRINT] key  
Use this key to set the paper size.  
If the conditions for tandem printing are met (page  
5-10), touch this key to enable tandem printing.  
See page 5-10 for more information.  
[OUTPUT] key  
Use this key to select sort, group or staple sort  
functions, and to select the output tray.  
5
6
[NUMBER OF PRINTS] setting key  
Use this key to set the number of copies.  
3
[2-SIDED] key  
[PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA] key  
When performing two-sided printing, use this key to  
select the orientation of the image on the back side  
of the paper. To have the front and back images  
oriented in the same direction, touch the [2-SIDED  
BOOKLET] key. To have the front and back images  
oriented opposite to each other, touch the [2-  
SIDED TABLET] key. Note that the size and  
orientation of the saved image may cause these  
keys to have the opposite effect. If neither key is  
selected, one-sided printing will take place.  
Touch this key to print a file and then have it  
automatically deleted.  
7
[PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA] key  
7
Touch this key to print a file. The file will not be  
automatically deleted after printing.  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
Batch printing  
All files in a folder that have the same user name and password can be printed at once.  
Touch the [BATCH P.] key in the file list  
screen of document filing mode.  
If a password has been established, touch  
the [PASSWORD] key.  
1
4
To print all files of a  
Enter the password with  
the numeric keys (5 to 8  
digits) and touch the  
[OK] key. Only files that  
2006/01/01  
specific type of job,  
touch the desired job  
USER NAME  
PASSWORD  
Suzuki  
2006/01/01  
tab. The files shown on  
that tab can be printed  
BATCH P.  
have  
password  
selected.  
the  
same  
will be  
as a batch.  
If you do not wish to enter a password, go to the  
next step.  
2 Touch the [USER NAME] key.  
To set the number of copies, touch the  
[CHANGE PRT.NO.] key.  
5
ALL FILES  
If you wish to use the  
USER NAME  
PASSD  
number of copies stored  
with each file, go to step  
9.  
CHANGE PRT.NO.  
NT AND DELETE THE TA  
Touch the user name of the files that you  
wish to print by batch printing.  
3
Touch the [APPLY THE NUMBER FROM  
STORED SETTING OF EACH JOB]  
checkbox to remove the checkmark.  
6
7
BATCH PRINT  
SELECT USER NAME.  
ALL USERS  
CANCEL  
OK  
USER UNKNOWN  
Sasaki  
1
2
Suzuki  
Hasegawa  
Ono  
Nakata  
Yamada  
APPLY THE NUMBER FRO  
EACH JOB  
ALL USERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
NOTE  
When [SELECTION OF [ALL USERS] IS NOT  
ALLOWED.] checkbox and [SELECTION OF [USER  
UNKNOWN] IS NOT ALLOWED.] are disabled in the  
administrator settings, the [ALL USERS] key and  
[USER UNKNOWN] key can be selected.  
The [ALL USERS] key can be touched to select all  
files in the folder (the files of all users).  
The [USER UNKNOWN] key can be touched to  
select all files in the folder that do not have a user  
name.  
Set the number of copies with the  
keys.  
The number of copies  
can be also set with the  
numeric keys.  
R FROM STORED SETG OF  
7-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
Touch the [PRINT AND DELETE THE  
DATA] key or the [PRINT AND SAVE THE  
DATA] key.  
8 Touch the [OK] key.  
9
CANCEL  
OK  
If the [PRINT AND  
DELETE THE DATA] key  
PRINT AND DELETE THE DATA  
PRINT AND SAVE THE DATA  
is touched, the files will  
be automatically deleted  
after printing.  
If the [PRINT AND SAVE  
THE DATA] key is  
touched, the files will be saved after printing.  
If there are no files that match the search  
conditions, you will return to the file list screen.  
NOTES  
If "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings for copy mode, print mode, or document filing mode,  
it will not be possible to perform batch printing of [ALL FILES].  
To display the job tab of a mode for which "Auditing mode" is enabled in the administrator settings, the account  
number must be entered.  
7
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
[Send]  
A saved file can be transmitted by Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder, fax, or Internet fax.  
These transmission methods require installation of the appropriate options.  
The following screen appears when the [SEND] key is touched. Select the destination and other settings required  
10  
for transmission and then touch the [SEND] ( ) key to transmit the file. Transmission settings include the  
resolution and transmission functions such as a timer setting. Change or select these settings as needed.  
NOTE  
Jobs that use the following special functions cannot be transmitted when called up. (The [SEND] key is greyed out  
in the operation selection screen.)  
Pamphlet copying, covers/insert, card shot, Multi shot.  
Jobs that use the following functions can be transmitted with certain restrictions when called up:  
Card shot:Can be transmitted if saved by scan save or image send.  
Multi shot (2in1):Can be transmitted if saved as 2in1 using a portrait original.  
[Example of FAX mode]  
CANCEL  
STANDARD  
FAX  
MODE SWITCH  
ADDRESS BOOK  
RESOLUTION  
ADDRESS REVIEW  
SPECIAL MODES  
SUB ADDRESS  
Basic specifications  
Yamada
SEND  
1
2
8
9
[RESOLUTION] key  
Use this key to set the resolution.  
[ADDRESS REVIEW] key  
Touch this key to display the destinations.  
[FILE FORMAT] key  
[SPECIAL MODES] key  
The [FILE FORMAT] key appears in scan mode  
(Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, or Scan to Network  
Folder). Touch this key to set the file format of scan  
images that you transmit.  
Touch this key to display the special function menu.  
The functions that can be selected vary depending  
on the transmission mode:  
Scan to E-mail/FTP/Network Folder  
TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.  
FAX  
TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.  
FAX OWN ADDRESS SENDING: Your sender's  
information can be included on the fax pages  
printed out by the receiving machine.  
Internet FAX  
3
4
[FILE NAME/USER NAME] display  
This shows the file name and user name of the file  
to be transmitted.  
[
] key (Speed dial key)  
Use this key to specify a destination by entering the  
3-digit number that is assigned to an e-mail  
address or fax number when it is stored in a one-  
touch key or group key.  
TIMER : The transmission time can be specified.  
I-FAX OWN ADDRESS SEND: Your sender's  
information can be included on the Internet fax  
pages printed out by the receiving machine.  
5
[MODE SWITCH] key  
Use this key to select the transmission mode (Scan  
to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network Folder,  
fax, or Internet fax).  
10  
[SEND] key  
Touch this key after selecting transmission settings  
to begin transmission. (The [START] key can also  
be pressed to begin transmission.)  
6
7
[CANCEL] key  
Touch this key to return to the operation selection  
screen.  
[ADDRESS BOOK] key  
Touch this key to display the destinations stored in  
the directory.  
7-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
11  
12  
[SEND SETTINGS] key  
[SUB ADDRESS] key or [ADDRESS ENTRY] key  
Touch this key to directly enter the destination for  
a Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to Network  
Folder, or Internet fax transmission.  
Touch this key to enter the sub-address and  
passcode for an F-code fax transmission.  
The [SEND SETTINGS] key is displayed in  
scanner mode and in Internet fax mode.  
Touch this key to set the subject and file name. In  
scanner mode, the sender name can also be set.  
NOTE  
See the "Operation manual (for facsimile)" and "Operation manual (for image send)" for detailed explanations of  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11  
12  
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
, and  
.
[Property change]  
Select this operation to change the attribute of a saved file. Three attributes are available: [SHARING],  
[PROTECT], and [ CONFIDENTIAL].  
The following screen appears when the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key is selected in the operation selection screen.  
Note the restrictions below on changing the attribute.  
[Restrictions on changing the attribute]  
CANCEL  
A4  
OK  
JOB SETTINGS / PROPERTY CHANGE  
Basic specifications  
A file that is set to [SHARING] can be  
changed to [PROTECT] or [CONFIDENTIAL].  
However, a [SHARING] file that is saved in the  
Quick File folder can only be changed to  
[PROTECT].  
Yamada Taro  
SHARING  
PROTECT  
CONFIDENTIAL  
PASSWORD  
A file that is set to [PROTECT] can be  
changed to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].  
However, a [PROTECT] file that is saved in  
the Quick File folder can only be changed to  
[SHARING].  
A file that is saved in the Quick File folder  
cannot be changed to [CONFIDENTIAL].  
3 Touch the [OK] key.  
Touch the [PROPERTY CHANGE] key in  
the operation selection screen.  
1
PROPERTY  
CHANGE  
OK  
NCEL  
7
DETAIL  
2 Touch the key of the desired attribute.  
SHARING  
If you are changing a  
[SHARING]  
[PROTECT]  
or  
to  
file  
CONFIDENTIAL  
[CONFIDENTIAL],  
touch the [PASSWORD]  
key and enter the  
password.  
PROTECT  
PASSWORD  
7-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
[Move]  
[Delete]  
This operation is used to move a file to a different  
folder.  
This operation is used to delete the selected file.  
Touch the [DELETE] key in the operation select  
screen. A message asking you to confirm the  
deletion will appear. Touch the [YES] key to delete  
the file.  
Only [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL] files can be  
deleted. (A [PROTECT] file can be deleted by first  
using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the  
attribute to [SHARING].)  
The following screen appears when the [MOVE]  
key is selected.  
Only [SHARING] and [CONFIDENTIAL] files can  
be moved. A [PROTECT] file can be moved by first  
using [PROPERTY CHANGE] to change the  
attribute to [SHARING] or [CONFIDENTIAL].  
CANCEL  
JOB SETTINGS / MOVE  
A4  
Basic specifications  
Yamada Taro  
[Detail]  
SELECT THE FOLDER THE FILE IS MOVED TO.  
This operation is used to show detailed information  
on the selected file.  
Touch the [DETAIL] key to display the information.  
The information appears on two screens. Touch the  
FILE NAME  
MOVE TO:  
Basic specifications  
MOVE  
key or  
screens.  
key to move between the two  
Touch the [MOVE TO:] key and select the  
folder to which you wish to move the file.  
Select the main folder or a folder in the  
custom folder. A file cannot be moved to the  
Quick File folder.  
The file name can be changed in the information  
screen. To change the name, touch the [FILE  
NAME] key and enter the desired file name in the  
character entry screen that appears. See page 7-  
29 for the procedure for entering characters.  
1
The file name can be changed when moving a  
file. To change the name, touch the [FILE  
NAME] key and enter the desired file name.  
See page 7-29 for the procedure for entering  
characters.  
2 Touch the [OK] key.  
N FOLDER  
OK  
3 Touch the [MOVE] key.  
amada Taro  
OVED TO.  
ations  
A4  
MOVE  
4 Touch the [CANCEL] key.  
You will return to the  
CANCEL  
operation  
screen.  
selection  
A4  
aro  
7-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
CALLING UP AND USING A FILE  
Calling up and manipulating a file from the job status screen  
Files saved using the "FILE" and "QUICK FILE" functions appear as keys in the finished job status screen.  
You can view information on a file that appears in this screen and manipulate the file.  
To view information on the file, touch the  
[DETAIL] key.  
1 Press the [JOB STATUS] key.  
4
AGE SEND  
DATA  
The job status screen  
Use the  
keys  
appears.  
COPY  
to change screens.  
DETAIL  
SYSTEM  
When you are finished,  
touch the [OK] key to  
return to the screen of  
step 3.  
JOB STATUS SETTINGS  
CALL  
2 Touch the [COMPLETE] key.  
DETAIL OF  
COPY  
OK  
FILE NAME:  
COPY_20031021_153050  
CALL  
1/2  
The finished job screen  
appears.  
JOB QUEUE  
SIZE:A4  
RESOLUTION:600x600dpi  
1/8  
COMPLETE  
DATE:2003/10/10 15:30  
PAGES:10  
DETAIL  
DETAIL OF  
COPY  
OK  
FILE NAME  
COPY_20031021_153050  
CALL  
DOCUMENT  
STYLE:  
2/2  
1-SIDED  
DATA SIZE: 21,987,543KB  
3 Touch the key of the desired file.  
SPECIAL  
MODES:  
OUTPUT:  
FILE FORMAT:  
If there are more keys  
than can appear in one  
screen and the desired  
file does not appear,  
JOBS COMPLETED  
SET TIME  
NUM  
Tanaka7890123456 14:38 12/09 01  
COPY  
14:38 12/09 00  
Suzuki783456 14:09 12/09 00  
touch the  
key to change  
screens.  
The touched key is highlighted.  
key or  
5 Touch the [CALL] key.  
COPY  
13:27 12/09 00  
The operation selection  
screen appears.  
CALL  
7
X JOB  
INTE-FAX  
Select and perform the desired operation as  
(page 7-15).  
7-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders  
This section explains how to create, edit, and delete user names and custom folders for saving files with the  
document filing function. User names and custom folders are created and edited at the operation panel of the  
machine or in the Web page.  
NOTES  
A previously stored name cannot be used when creating a new user name or custom folder. However, the same password  
can be used more than once.  
A password cannot be omitted when creating a user name.  
General procedure for creating, editing, and deleting user names and folders  
Follow steps 1 to 3 below to create, edit, or delete a user name or custom folder. In step 3, select the key for the  
specific operation that you wish to perform.  
Touch the key of the operation that you  
wish to perform.  
Go to the page indicated below for the selected  
operation.  
1 Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.  
3
LINE  
AGE SEND  
DATA  
COPY  
SYSTEM  
JOB STATUS SETTINGS  
(1)  
(2)  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL  
OK  
USER NAME REGISTRATION  
AMEND/DELETE USER NAME  
Touch the [DOCUMENT FILING CONTROL]  
key.  
AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER  
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION  
2
DEFAULT  
SETTINGS  
TOTAL COUNT  
(3)  
(4)  
ADDRESS CONTROL  
SENDER CONTROL  
(1) [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key  
Program a user name. (See the next page)  
(2) [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME] key  
Edit or delete a user name. (See page 7-26)  
(3) [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key  
Create a custom folder. (See page 7-27)  
(4) [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER] key  
Edit or delete a custom folder. (See page 7-28)  
DOCUMENT FILING  
CONTROL  
ADMINISTRATOR  
7-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Programming a user name  
To program a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [USER NAME REGISTRATION] key in  
step 3, and then follow these steps:  
If you wish to specify a folder for the user  
name, touch the [STORED TO:] key. If you  
1 Touch the [USER NAME] key.  
6
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
wish to use the main folder, go to step 8.  
The lowest number that  
has not yet been  
programmed appears  
No.001  
No.001 REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.  
USER NAME  
Yamada  
USER NAME  
PASSWORD  
PAS
automatically in "No.".  
Touch the number to  
display a character entry  
screen and enter a user  
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE F  
STORED TO:  
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE  
MAIN FOLDER  
STORED TO:  
name (maximum of 16 characters). See page 7-29  
for the procedure for entering characters.  
The folders that have been created appear.  
Touch the desired folder. If you wish to  
create a new folder, or if no folders have  
been created, touch the [ADD NEW] key.  
7
2 Touch the [INITIAL] key.  
A character entry screen  
NEXT  
appears. Enter up to 10  
STORED TO:  
MAIN FOLDER  
ADD NEW  
search characters. See  
INITIAL  
page 7-29 for the  
CUSTOM FOLDER 1  
CUSTOM FOLDER 2  
1/1  
procedure for entering  
characters.  
CUSTOM FOLDER 3  
CUSTOM FOLDER 5  
CUSTOM FOLDER 7  
CUSTOM FOLDER 4  
CUSTOM FOLDER 6  
CUSTOM FOLDER 8  
R THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.  
ALL FOLDERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRS  
UVWXY  
3 Touch the [PASSWORD] key.  
If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a  
name for the folder as explained on page 7-27.  
The user name programmed in step 1 is selected  
as the user name of the folder.  
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
A password cannot be  
No.001  
omitted.  
Yamada  
USER NAME  
PASSWORD  
SELECT DEFAULT FOLDER THE FIL  
STORED TO:  
8 Touch the [EXIT] key.  
You will return to the  
"USER  
REGISTRATION"  
screen.  
"REGISTRATION  
COMPLETED."  
NAME  
EXIT  
Set a password for the user name (enter a  
5-digit password with the numeric keys).  
This will be the password  
4
IS  
will  
7
– – – – –  
for the user name  
CANCEL  
appear highlighted next  
to "No.".  
entered in step 1.  
As each digit is entered,  
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.  
"
-" changes to " ". If  
you make a mistake,  
press the [C] key and  
then enter the correct number.  
To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To program  
another user name, touch the [NEXT] key.  
If you touched the [EXIT]  
9
NEXT  
EXIT  
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
key, you will return to the  
screen of step 3 on page  
7-24. If you touched the  
[NEXT] key, a new user  
entry screen will appear.  
Repeat steps 1 to 9 to  
program a new user.  
Yamada  
INITIAL  
EXIT  
WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.  
OK  
CANCEL  
10-KEY PAD.  
7-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Editing and deleting a user name  
To edit or delete a user name, follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow these steps:  
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE USER NAME]  
[Editing]  
Touch the key of each item that you wish to  
1
key.  
OK  
4
edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 9 in  
25).  
AMEND/DELETE USER NAME  
AMEND/DELETE OM FOLDER  
When you have finished  
USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE  
No.001  
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.  
editing  
"REGISTRATION  
COMPLETED."  
the  
items,  
IS  
Yamada  
USER NAME  
PASSWORD  
INIT  
will  
Touch the [USER NAME] key that you wish  
to edit or delete.  
appear highlighted next  
to "NO.".  
2
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH  
STORED TO:  
MAIN FOLDER  
EXIT  
USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE  
SELECT USER NAME TO AMEND/DELETE.  
1/1  
Suzuki  
Sasaki  
Nakata  
When you have finished editing the  
desired items, touch the [EXIT] key.  
To edit another user  
Hasegawa  
5
Ono  
Yamada  
ALL USERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN  
OPQRST UVWXYZ  
DELETE  
EXIT  
name, repeat steps 2 to  
4.  
A password entry screen will appear.  
ITIAL  
Yamada  
To exit, touch the [EXIT]  
key in the screen of step  
2.  
Enter the 5-digit password with the  
numeric keys.  
3
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.  
NOTE  
When a user name is changed, the change is not  
updated to any previously saved data (files or  
folders).  
CANCEL  
BCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ  
After entering the password, the following screen  
will appear.  
[Deleting]  
6 Touch the [DELETE] key.  
DELETE  
EXIT  
USER NAME / AMEND/DELETE  
No.001  
Yamada  
USER NAME  
PASSWORD  
INITIAL  
Yamada  
DELETE  
EXIT  
SELECT THE DEFAULT FOLDER THE FILE WITH THIS USER NAME IS STORED.  
STORED TO:  
ITIAL  
Yamada  
MAIN FOLDER  
To edit a user name, perform steps 4 and 5.  
To delete a user name, perform steps 6 and 7.  
7 Touch the [YES] key.  
You will return to the  
screen of step 2. To  
delete another user  
name, repeat steps 2, 3,  
5 and 6.  
DELETE THE USER NAME?  
Yamada  
YES  
NO  
To exit, touch the [EXIT]  
key in the screen of step  
2.  
7-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
Creating a custom folder  
Up to 500 custom folders can be created. When no further folders can be created, delete unneeded folders (page  
7-28) and then create a new folder. A password can be omitted when creating a folder. To create a custom folder,  
follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24, touch the [CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION] key in step 3, and then follow  
the steps below.  
1 Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key.  
5 Touch the [OK] key.  
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION  
The lowest number that  
has not yet been  
programmed appears  
No.001  
EXIT  
FOLDER NAME  
OK  
CANCEL  
INIT
automatically in "No.".  
Touch the number to  
display a character entry  
screen and enter a folder  
USER NAME  
10-KEY PAD.  
name (maximum of 28 characters). See page 7-29  
for the procedure for entering characters.  
6 Touch the [USER NAME] key.  
No.001  
You will select a user  
2 Touch the [INITIAL] key.  
name that will be  
associated with the  
folder name you are  
programming.  
USER FOLDER 1  
FOLDER NAME  
USER1  
PAS  
INITIAL  
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION  
A character entry screen  
No.001  
appears. Enter up to 10  
USER NAME  
USER FOLDER 1  
FOLDER NAME  
INITIAL  
search characters. See  
page 7-29 for the  
procedure for entering  
characters.  
Selection of a user name  
cannot be omitted.  
P
USEE  
The programmed user names appear.  
Touch the desired user name. If you do not  
wish to use any of the user names that  
appear, touch the [ADD NEW] key to  
program a new user name.  
7
If you wish to set a password for the new  
folder, touch the [PASSWORD] key.  
3
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION  
A
password can be  
No.001  
omitted.  
If you are omitting a  
password, go to step 6.  
CUSTOM FOLDER REGISTRATION  
USER FOLDER 1  
FOLDER NAME  
SELECT USER NAME.  
Suzuki  
OK  
1/1  
INITIAL  
PASSWORD  
Sasaki  
Nakata  
Yamada  
Hasegawa  
Ono  
USER NAME  
ADD NEW  
7
ALL FOLDERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ  
When you touch a user name, a password entry  
screen appears.  
Set a password for the folder (enter a 5-  
digit password with the numeric keys).  
This will be the password  
4
If you touched the [ADD NEW] key, program a user  
name as explained on page 7-25. The folder name  
programmed in step 1 will be selected as the folder  
for the user.  
for the folder name  
CANCEL  
entered in step 1.  
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.  
Enter the 5-digit password of the selected  
user name with the numeric keys.  
8
ENTER PASSWORD VIA THE 10-KEY PAD.  
CANCEL  
BCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ  
7-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SYSTEM SETTINGS  
To exit, touch the [EXIT] key. To create  
another folder, touch the [NEXT] key.  
If you touched the [EXIT]  
9 Touch the [OK] key.  
10  
key, you will return to the  
OK  
NEXT  
EXIT  
screen of step 3 on page  
7-24. If you touched the  
[NEXT] key, a new folder  
1/1  
ADD NEW  
screen  
will  
appear.  
SWORD  
Repeat steps 1 to 10 to  
create a new folder.  
Editing/deleting a custom folder  
To edit a previously created folder (change the folder name, initial, password, or user name), or to delete a folder,  
follow steps 1 and 2 on page 7-24 and then follow the steps below.  
When deleting a folder...  
A folder that contains files cannot be deleted. Either move the files to a different folder or delete them before deleting the folder.  
: [MOVE] (see page 7-22)  
: [DELETE] (see page 7-22)  
Touch the [AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM  
FOLDER] key.  
[Editing]  
1
Touch the key of each item that you wish to  
4
edit (edit as explained in steps 1 to 10 of  
"Creating a custom folder" on page 7-27).  
AMEND/DELETE USER NAME  
DELETE  
EXIT  
CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE  
AMEND/DELETE CUSTOM FOLDER  
No.001  
REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED.  
USER FOLDER 1  
FOLDER NAME  
USER1  
INITIAL  
PASSWORD  
Yamada  
USER NAME  
Touch the [FOLDER NAME] key that you  
wish to edit or delete.  
2
After editing the items and returning to the screen of  
step 3, "REGISTRATION IS COMPLETED." will be  
highlighted to the right of "No.".  
EXIT  
CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE  
SELECT CUSTOM FOLDER TO AMEND/DELETE.  
CUSTOM FOLDER 1  
CUSTOM FOLDER 3  
CUSTOM FOLDER 5  
CUSTOM FOLDER 7  
CUSTOM FOLDER 2  
CUSTOM FOLDER 4  
1/2  
To stop using  
a
password, touch the  
[PASSWORD] key and then touch the [OK] key  
without entering anything for the password. [-] will  
appear and the password will be cancelled.  
CUSTOM FOLDER 6  
CUSTOM FOLDER 8  
ALL FOLDERS  
ABCD  
EFGHI  
JKLMN OPQRST UVWXYZ  
When you have finished editing the items,  
touch the [EXIT] key.  
5
If a password has been set for the folder, a  
password entry screen will appear. Enter the  
correct 5-digit password with the numeric keys.  
To edit another folder, repeat steps 2 to 5.  
[Deleting]  
6 Touch the [DELETE] key.  
3 Edit or delete the folder.  
DELETE  
EXIT  
CUSTOM FOLDER / AMEND/DELETE  
No.001  
EXIT  
DELETE  
USER FOLDER 1  
FOLDER NAME  
USER1  
*****  
INITIAL  
PASSWORD  
ORD  
Yamada  
USER NAME  
7 Touch the [YES] key.  
To edit the folder, perform steps 4 and 5.  
To delete the folder, perform steps 6 and 7.  
To exit, touch the [EXIT] key.  
You will return to the  
screen of step 2.  
DELETE THE FOLDER?  
To delete another folder,  
repeat steps 2, 6, and 7.  
To exit, touch the [EXIT]  
key in the screen of step  
2.  
USER FOLDER 1  
YES  
NO  
7-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ENTERING CHARACTERS  
To enter or edit characters in setting screens such as auto dial key programming screens, follow the steps below.  
Characters that can be entered are alphabetical characters, special characters, numbers, and symbols.  
Entering alphabetical characters  
(Example: Sharp äÄ)  
1 Touch the [S] key.  
5 Touch the [ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key.  
Characters cannot be  
entered beyond the " " mark.  
Sharp  
6 Touch the [ä] key.  
To switch between upper case and lower case,  
touch the [ABC abc] key. When ABC is  
Sharp  
highlighted, upper case letters are entered.  
abc] key.  
2 Touch the [ABC  
S
To switch between upper case and lower case,  
touch the [ÃÄÂ  
ãäâ] key. When ãäâ is  
highlighted, lower case letters are entered.  
ãäâ] key.  
7 Touch the [ÃÄÂ  
Sharp ä  
Touch the [h] key, [a] key, [r] key, and [p]  
key.  
3
Shar  
8 Touch the [Ä] key.  
Sharp ä  
7
If you make a mistake, touch the  
key to move  
the cursor ( ) back one space and then enter the  
correct character. You can also press the [AB/ab  
12#$%] key during entry to enter a number or  
symbol.  
You can press the [ABC/abc] key during entry to  
return to alphabetical character entry. You can  
also enter numbers and symbols.  
4 Touch the [SPACE] key.  
9 When finished, touch the [OK] key.  
Sharp  
Sharp äÄ  
The cursor ( ) moves forward and a space is  
entered.  
You will exit the character entry screen and return  
to the programming screen. If you touch the  
[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming  
screen without storing the entered characters.  
7-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ENTERING CHARACTERS  
Entering numbers and symbols  
12#$%] key.  
When you have finished entering  
characters, touch the [OK] key.  
1 Touch the [AB/ab  
3
1&1  
When the characters "12#$%" are highlighted,  
number/symbol entry mode is selected.  
You will exit the character entry screen and return  
to the programming screen. If you touch the  
[CANCEL] key, you will return to the programming  
screen without storing the entered characters.  
2 Enter the desired number or symbol.  
Numbers and symbols that can be entered are as  
follows:  
NOTE  
Screen 1/2  
The following symbols cannot be used when  
entering a file name or folder name.  
\
?
>
/
!
"
*
;
|
:
,
<
&
#
Spaces and the following symbols may be replaced  
by other characters.  
Screen 2/2  
$
.
%
=
}
'
(
[
)
]
+
^
-
`
@
~
{
Change screens by touching the  
displayed in the screen. If you make a mistake,  
touch the key to move the cursor ( ) back one  
key or  
key  
space and then enter the correct character.  
You can continue touching keys to enter  
characters. You can also touch another character  
type selection key ([ ÃÄÂ/ãäâ] key or [AB/ab  
12#$%] key) to enter characters other than  
numbers and symbols.  
7-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TROUBLESHOOTING  
This section explains problems frequently encountered when using the document filing function. If you experience  
any difficulty, refer to the following table. For information on general machine problems, printer problems, fax  
problems, and network scanner problems, please see the troubleshooting sections of the appropriate manuals.  
Problem  
A saved file has Was the file called up and then printed by A file that is printed using the [PRINT AND  
disappeared. touching the [PRINT AND DELETE THE DELETE THE DATA] key is automatically  
Check  
Cause and solution  
DATA] key?  
deleted after being printed. To print a file  
without deleting it, use the [PRINT AND  
SAVE THE DATA] key.  
A file cannot be Is the file's attribute set to [PROTECT]?  
deleted.  
A file cannot be deleted when its attribute is  
set to [PROTECT]. Change the attribute to  
[SHARING] and then delete the file.  
A
file's attribute Is the file in the main or custom folder?  
A file in the Quick File folder cannot be set to  
[CONFIDENTIAL]. Move the file to a  
different folder or set it to [PROTECT].  
cannot be set to  
[CONFIDENTIAL].  
A
file's attribute Is the file set to [CONFIDENTIAL]?  
A file cannot be simultaneously set to  
[CONFIDENTIAL] and [PROTECT]. If set to  
cannot be changed  
to [PROTECT].  
[CONFIDENTIAL],  
use  
[PROPERTY  
CHANGE] (page 7-21) to change the  
attribute to [PROTECT].  
A name in the Quick Was the name programmed in the advanced If the name was programmed in the  
File folder is cut off. transmission settings?  
advanced transmission settings before the  
file was saved in the Quick File folder, that  
name will be used. However, if the name is  
longer than the maximum name length of the  
Quick File folder (30 characters), the excess  
characters will be discarded.  
Resolution settings Was the file saved at low resolution?  
are not possible.  
A saved file cannot be transmitted at a  
resolution higher than the resolution at  
which it was saved.  
A file name cannot Have you entered prohibited characters in Certain characters (symbols) cannot be  
be  
changed.  
stored  
or the file name?  
used in file names. See "ENTERING  
CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and  
symbols) on page 7-29.  
A
custom folder Have you entered prohibited characters in Certain characters (symbols) cannot be  
name cannot be the folder name?  
stored or changed.  
used in folder names. See "ENTERING  
CHARACTERS" (entering numbers and  
symbols) on page 7-29.  
7
The printing speed The file was saved using one of the following When a file is saved using one of the  
of a saved file is resolution settings:  
resolutions setting at left, the printing speed  
will be slower than when other resolution  
settings are used.  
slow.  
200 x 200 dpi resolution.  
STANDARD (200 x 100 dpi) or FINE (200  
x 200 dpi)  
Black dots appear Was the file saved at other than the following This problem can be alleviated by setting the  
when a file that was resolutions?  
resolution to 600x600dpi when saving a file  
with scan save. The problem can be further  
alleviated by selecting HALF TONE after  
setting the resolution to 600x600dpi, as light  
images will be printed lightly.  
saved  
document  
with  
the  
filing  
600x600dpi  
600x600dpi and HALF TONE  
function is printed.  
To check the resolution of the saved file,  
touch the [DETAIL] key in step 5 on page 7-  
16.  
7-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CHAPTER 8  
SPECIFICATIONS  
This chapter contains useful information about the machine.  
Page  
SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................... 8-2  
INDEX..................................................................................................... 8-4  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIFICATIONS  
Type  
Console  
Print system  
Exposure system  
Developer system  
Paper feed system  
Fusing system  
Resolution  
Electrophotographic system  
OPC  
Dry-type two-component magnetic brush development  
4 trays and bypass tray  
Heater roller  
Scan: 600 x 600 dpi, output: 600 x 600 dpi  
256 levels  
Gradation  
Originals  
Sheets, bound documents  
Maximum size: A3 or 11" x 17"  
Copy paper  
Copy sizes  
Plain paper and special papers  
Max. A3 or 11" x 17", min. A5R or 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R, Postcard  
Image loss: Max 8 mm or 21/64" (leading edge and trailing edge in total),  
max. 8 mm or 21/64" (along all other edges in total)  
Warm-up time  
First-copy time  
120 seconds or less  
MX-M550U/MX-M620U/MX-M550N/MX-M620N  
4.0 seconds or less*  
MX-M700U/MX-M700N  
3.5 seconds or less*  
* When A4 (8-1/2 x 11") size paper is fed horizontally from tray1  
"
Copy ratio  
Variable: 25 to 400% in 1% increments, total 376 steps  
Fixed presets: 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%  
and 400% for AB system, 25%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 200% and 400%  
for inch system.  
Continuous copy  
999 copies  
Dimensions  
(including automatic  
document feeder)  
728 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) x 1192 mm (H)  
(28-43/64" (W) x 26-47/64" (D) x 46-15/16" (H))  
Weight (main unit only)  
Approx. 185 kg (Approx. 408 lbs.)  
Overall dimensions  
(When tray is extended)  
1263 mm (W) x 679 mm (D) (49-23/32" (W) x 26-47/64"(D))  
Required power supply  
Power consumption  
Operating conditions  
Local voltage 10% (For power supply requirements, see the name plate located  
on the back of the main unit.)  
220 - 240V  
120 - 127V  
8A  
16A  
1.84 kW  
1.8 kW  
Temperature: 10ºC to 30ºC (50ºF to 86ºF)  
Humidity: 20% to 85%  
Automatic document feeder  
Type  
Two-side simultaneous scanning system  
Original size  
Capacity  
A3 to A5 (11" x 17" to 5-1/2" x 8-1/2")  
2
Maximum of 150 sheets (80 g/m (20 lbs.)) or total stack height of 19.5 mm  
(49/64") or less.  
Original exchange speed  
Power supply  
One-sided: 65 pages/min.  
Two-sided: 76 sides/min.  
Supplied from machine  
Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine.  
8-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SPECIFICATIONS  
Continuous copying speed (when the offset function is not used)  
MX-M550U/MX-M550N  
MX-M620U/MX-M620N  
MX-M700U/MX-M700N  
Copy paper size  
100% / Reduced / Enlarged  
34 copies/min.  
A3 (11" x 17")  
30 copies/min.  
35 copies/min.  
55 copies/min.  
40 copies/min.  
55 copies/min.  
40 copies/min.  
40 copies/min.  
39 copies/min.  
45 copies/min.  
70 copies/min.  
48 copies/min.  
70 copies/min.  
48 copies/min.  
48 copies/min.  
B4 (8-1/2" x 14")  
39 copies/min.  
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")  
62 copies/min.  
A4R (8-1/2" x 11"R)  
B5 (7-1/4" x 10-1/2")  
B5R (7-1/4" x 10-1/2"R)  
A5R (8-1/2" x 5-1/2"R)  
45 copies/min.  
62 copies/min.  
45 copies/min.  
45 copies/min.  
Centre tray specifications  
Output method  
Face-down output  
Maximum number  
of sheets  
2
(80g/m  
(20lbs.) 250 sheets*  
/recommended  
paper)  
Paper type  
Plain paper and special paper  
* The maximum number of pages that can be held varies  
depending on ambient conditions in the installation  
location, the type of paper, and the storage conditions of  
the paper.  
Acoustic Noise Emission (measurement according to ISO7779)  
Sound power level LwA  
Printing mode  
7.3B  
Standby mode  
5.0B  
Bystander positions  
Operator position  
58dB(A)  
58dB(A)  
34dB(A)  
35dB(A)  
Sound pressure level LpA  
(reference)  
* Noise emission when peripheral devices are installed  
Emission Concentration (measurement according to RAL-UZ62: Edition Jan. 2002)  
3
Ozone  
Dust  
0.02 mg/m or less  
3
0.075 mg/m or less  
8
3
Styrene  
0.07 mg/m or less  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
[
] key................................................................. 1-13  
Calling up and using a saved file.......................... 7-15  
-Delete............................................................... 7-22  
-Detail................................................................ 7-22  
-Move ................................................................ 7-22  
-Print.................................................................. 7-17  
-Property change .............................................. 7-21  
-Send................................................................. 7-20  
-Card shot ..................................1-6, 5-2, 5-29, 7-12  
Centre erase........................................................... 5-4  
Centre tray.....................................................1-10, 4-9  
[CENTRE TRAY] key.............................................. 3-6  
Changing the paper size in paper tray .........2-3 to 2-6  
Clear all key...................................................1-13, 7-4  
Clear key .......................................................1-13, 7-4  
Clock .................................................................... 2-18  
Confidential ............................................................ 7-3  
Contents.......................................................0-5 to 0-6  
Continuous copying speed..................................... 8-3  
[COPY] key........................................................... 1-13  
Cover of the duplex unit........................................ 1-11  
Covers/inserts ........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-12  
Creating a custom folder ...................................... 7-27  
Custom folder...........................7-3, 7-24, 7-27 to 7-28  
[#/P] key ............................................................... 1-13  
Numerics  
1-sided copy.................................................. 4-7, 4-11  
1-sided copy-Automatic document feeder.............. 4-7  
1-sided copy-Document glass.............................. 4-11  
256MB expansion memory board ........................ 1-12  
2in1 ............................................................. 5-24, 7-12  
2-sided copy.........................................1-3, 4-10, 4-13  
A  
Acceptable originals............................................... 4-2  
Account number................................................... 1-18  
Additional fax memory.......................................... 1-12  
Address control .................................................... 2-18  
Adjusting the exposure.................................. 1-3, 4-14  
Administrator settings........................................... 2-18  
Alarm display........................................................ 3-16  
All custom setting list............................................ 2-20  
Application communication module............. 1-12, 3-19  
Application integration module............................. 1-12  
Attributes................................................................ 7-3  
Auditing mode ...................................................... 1-18  
Auto image ........................................................... 4-15  
Auto power shut-off mode ...................................... 1-9  
Automatic copy image rotation............................... 4-4  
Automatic document feeder .................1-10, 2-31, 4-2  
Automatic document feeder .........................................  
-1-sided copies.................................................... 4-7  
-Acceptable originals........................................... 4-2  
-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-10  
-Misfeed original................................................ 2-31  
-Setting originals ................................................. 4-3  
-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2  
Automatic exposure adjustment........................... 4-14  
Automatic selection .............................................. 4-15  
Automatic two-sided copying  
D  
Data security kit.................................................... 1-12  
Default settings..................................................... 2-20  
[DETAIL] key......................................................... 1-16  
Display contrast.................................................... 2-20  
Display switching keys.......................................... 1-16  
Disposal of hole punch scrap ............................... 3-10  
Document feeder tray......................................4-2, 4-3  
Document filing control......................................... 2-18  
Document filing function..................................1-8, 7-1  
Document filing user / folder list ........................... 2-20  
[DOCUMENT FILING] key ............................1-13, 7-4  
Document glass  
-1-sided copies.................................................. 4-11  
-Automatic two-sided copying ........................... 4-13  
-Placing originals................................................. 4-3  
-User maintenance.............................................. 6-2  
Document transfer cover ...............................2-31, 4-3  
Dual page copy ........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-5  
DUAL PAGE SCAN .............................................. 7-12  
Duplex unit ........................................................... 1-11  
-Automatic document feeder ............................. 4-10  
-Document glass ............................................... 4-13  
Automatic two-sided printing ................................ 2-13  
Auxiliary tray......................................................... 2-10  
B  
B/W reverse............................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31  
Barcode font kit .................................................... 1-12  
Binding change .................................................... 4-13  
Book copy ..............................................1-5, 5-2, 5-26  
Book original .......................................................... 5-5  
Bypass tray.........................................1-10, 2-28, 4-20  
E  
Editing and deleting  
-Custom folder................................................... 7-28  
-User names...................................................... 7-26  
Energy saving features........................................... 1-9  
Energy Star guidelines ........................................... 1-9  
Enlargement......................................................... 4-15  
Entering characters..................................7-29 to 7-30  
Erase...............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-4, 7-12  
C  
[C] key ........................................................... 1-13, 7-4  
[CA] key......................................................... 1-13, 7-4  
Call for service ..................................................... 2-32  
[CALL] key............................................................ 1-16  
Calling up and using a file.................................... 7-13  
8-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
Examples of covers and inserts ............... 5-17 to 5-22  
-Covers.................................................. 5-18 to 5-21  
-Inserts.............................................................. 5-22  
External account module............................. 1-12, 3-20  
Loading paper ........................................................ 2-2  
-bypass tray....................................................... 2-10  
-tray 1 - tray 2 ...................................................... 2-2  
-tray 3 .................................................................. 2-5  
-tray 5 ........................................................2-7 to 2-9  
LOGOUT.............................................................. 1-13  
[LOGOUT] key.............................................1-13, 1-18  
Lower cover............................................................ 3-2  
F  
Facsimile expansion kit ........................................ 1-12  
Fax data receive/forward...................................... 2-18  
[FAX JOB] key...................................................... 1-16  
Features................................................................. 1-3  
[FILE FOLDER] key................................................ 7-5  
Finisher ......................................................... 1-10, 3-2  
[FINISHER TRAY] key............................................ 3-6  
Front cover .................................................... 1-10, 3-2  
Fusing unit..........................................1-11, 2-23, 2-24  
M  
Main features................................................1-3 to 1-8  
Main folder.............................................................. 7-3  
Main power switch.......................................1-11, 1-17  
Main screen............................................................ 5-2  
Manual exposure adjustment ............................... 4-14  
Manual selection .................................................. 4-16  
Margin Shift ..............................................1-4, 5-2, 5-3  
Meaning of "R" ....................................................... 1-2  
Mirror image ...........................................1-6, 5-2, 5-31  
Misfeed...................... 2-23 to 2-31, 3-11 to 3-12, 3-18  
Misfeed in the paper feed area.................2-26 to 2-30  
Misfeed original .................................................... 2-31  
Misfeed removal ................................................... 2-23  
-Tray 1 - tray 2 ................................................... 2-26  
-Tray 3 - tray 4 ................................................... 2-27  
-Automatic document feeder ............................. 2-31  
-Bypass tray ...................................................... 2-28  
-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-11  
-Inserter............................................................. 3-17  
-Transport area, fusing area, and exit area ....... 2-24  
-Tray 5 ...................................................2-29 to 2-30  
-Duplex unit ....................................................... 2-25  
Mode select key ................................................... 1-15  
Mode select keys...........................................1-13, 7-4  
More information on plain paper........................... 2-13  
More information on special media ...................... 2-13  
Multi shot................................................1-5, 5-3, 5-24  
G  
General procedure for using special functions....... 5-2  
Greyed out............................................................ 1-14  
Group .......................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9  
[GROUP] key.......................................................... 3-6  
H  
[HDD STATUS] key................................................. 7-5  
Heavy paper................................................ 2-12, 2-13  
Highlighted ........................................................... 1-14  
Hole punching ................................................. 1-8, 3-5  
I  
Icon ......................................................1-14, 5-17, 7-5  
[IMAGE SEND] key .............................................. 1-13  
Information ........................................................... 2-23  
Inserter.................................................1-8, 1-10, 3-14  
Installation requirements........................................ 0-2  
Interior.................................................................. 1-11  
Internet fax expansion kit ..................................... 1-12  
[INTERNET-FAX] key ........................................... 1-16  
Interrupting a copy run .................................. 1-7, 5-46  
N  
Network expansion kit .......................................... 1-12  
Network scanner expansion kit ............................ 1-12  
Non-standard sizes .....................2-12, 2-14, 2-17, 4-5  
Number of pages printed...................................... 1-18  
number of pages transmitted (scanned)............... 1-18  
Numeric keys.................................................1-13, 7-4  
J  
Job build..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-8, 7-12  
Job programs ....................................1-6, 5-44 to 5-45  
-Calling up......................................................... 5-45  
-Deleting............................................................ 5-45  
-Storing ............................................................. 5-44  
Job status screen................................................. 1-15  
[JOB STATUS] key ............................................... 1-13  
8
O  
Offset...............................................................1-7, 3-4  
[OFFSET] key......................................................... 3-6  
Operation panel...........................................1-10, 1-13  
-Document filing function..................................... 7-4  
-Inserter............................................................. 3-15  
Original guides ....................................................... 4-3  
Original orientation..........................................3-5, 4-4  
Original size .............................................4-2, 4-5, 4-6  
Output .............................................3-4, 3-6, 4-9, 4-12  
Output tray.....................................................1-10, 4-9  
K  
Keyboard select.................................................... 2-20  
L  
Labels................................................................... 2-12  
Landscape.............................................................. 1-2  
Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)...............1-10, 2-7, 2-29  
Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)...............1-10, 2-8, 2-30  
Left cover of paper drawer ................................... 1-11  
Left side cover release ......................................... 1-11  
List print................................................................ 2-20  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Selecting a function.............................................. 1-14  
Selecting the exposure level................................. 4-14  
Selecting the exposure mode............................... 4-14  
Selecting the output tray......................................... 4-9  
Sender control...................................................... 2-18  
Sender control list ................................................ 2-20  
Sending address list............................................. 2-20  
Setting the paper size...............................2-14 to 2-17  
Setting the paper type ..............................2-14 to 2-16  
Sharing................................................................... 7-3  
Sharp OSA........................................................... 3-19  
Sort...........................................................1-3, 3-4, 4-9  
[SORT] key............................................................. 3-6  
Special modes (Copier operation).......................... 5-2  
Special modes (Document filing function)............ 7-12  
Special paper ...........................................2-12 to 2-13  
Special papers ..................................................... 4-20  
Specifications...............................................8-2 to 8-3  
-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher...................3-2 to 3-3  
-Inserter............................................................. 3-14  
-Large capacity tray (AR-LC6)............................. 2-7  
-Large capacity tray (AR-LC7)............................. 2-8  
-Punch module.................................................... 3-3  
Specifications of paper trays ................................ 2-12  
Standard sizes...............................................1-2, 2-13  
Standard sizes in both the AB and inch systems ... 1-2  
Staple cartridge...................................................... 3-3  
Staple cartridge replacement .......................3-7 to 3-8  
Staple jam removal.....................................3-9 to 3-10  
Staple sort.......................................................1-7, 3-4  
[STAPLE SORT] key............................................... 3-6  
[STAPLE] key ....................................................... 3-15  
Stapler compiler ..................................................... 3-2  
Stapling positions................................................... 3-4  
[START] key.................................................1-13, 3-15  
[STOP/DELETE] key ............................................ 1-16  
Storage of supplies............................................... 2-22  
System settings...........................................2-18, 7-24  
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key............................1-13, 7-4  
P  
Pamphlet copy..........................................1-4, 5-2, 5-6  
Paper curled......................................................... 2-33  
Paper tray settings ...................................... 2-14, 2-20  
Part names  
-Exterior ............................................................ 1-10  
-Finisher and the saddle stitch finisher................ 3-2  
-Inserter............................................................. 3-14  
-Interior.............................................................. 1-11  
-Operation panel ...............................1-13, 3-15, 7-4  
-Trays................................................................... 2-2  
Password................................................................ 7-8  
Peripheral devices....................................... 1-10, 1-12  
Photo.................................................................... 4-14  
Photoconductive drum ......................................... 1-11  
Placing originals..................................................... 4-3  
Plain paper............................................... 2-12 to 2-13  
Portrait.................................................................... 1-2  
Postcards ........................................2-10 to 2-11, 4-20  
Power .......................................................... 1-17, 2-32  
Power switch ............................................... 1-11, 1-17  
Preheat mode......................................................... 1-9  
Preset copy ratios................................................. 4-16  
[PRINT JOB] key.................................................. 1-16  
PRINT mode indicators........................................ 1-13  
Printer condition ................................................... 2-18  
Printer test page................................................... 2-20  
[PRIORITY] key.................................................... 1-16  
Proper storage ..................................................... 2-22  
Protect.................................................................... 7-3  
PS3 expansion kit ................................................ 1-12  
Punch module ............................................... 1-11, 3-2  
[PUNCH] key................................................. 3-6, 3-15  
Q  
Quick File folder ..................................................... 7-3  
[QUICK FILE FOLDER] key ................................... 7-5  
R  
[READ-END] key.................................4-12, 5-8 to 5-9  
Reduction............................................................. 4-15  
Reduction/Enlargement................................. 1-4, 4-15  
Replacing the toner cartridges............................. 2-21  
Right side cover.................................................... 1-11  
Rotation copying .................................................... 4-4  
T  
Tab copy.................................................1-6, 5-2, 5-26  
Tabbed paper............2-6, 2-10, 2-12 to 2-13, 3-15, 4-20, 5-12, 5-27  
Tandem copy..........................................1-5, 5-2, 5-10  
Text....................................................................... 4-14  
Text/photo............................................................. 4-14  
The machine does not operate......................2-32, 6-3  
Toner cartridge ............................................1-11, 2-21  
Top cover................................................................ 3-2  
Total count............................................................ 2-20  
Total number of originals ........................................ 4-2  
Touch panel...................................1-13, 1-14, 7-4, 7-5  
Transparency film .............. 2-6, 2-12, 2-13, 4-20, 5-23  
Transparency inserts..............................1-5, 5-2, 5-23  
Tray................................................................1-10, 3-2  
Tray 1..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26  
Tray 2..........................................1-10, 2-2 to 2-4, 2-26  
Tray 3....................................................1-10, 2-5, 2-27  
Tray 4....................................................1-10, 2-6, 2-27  
Tray 5................................... 1-10, 2-7, 2-8, 2-29, 2-30  
S  
Saddle stitch.................................................... 1-8, 3-5  
Saddle stitch finisher..................................... 1-10, 3-2  
Saddle stitch tray.................................................... 3-2  
[SADDLE STITCH] key .......................................... 3-6  
Saving a document image file.................... 7-6 to 7-12  
-Filing ........................................................ 7-7 to 7-8  
-Print jobs............................................................ 7-9  
-Quick file ............................................................ 7-6  
-Scan save ............................................ 7-10 to 7-11  
[SCAN TO] key..................................................... 1-15  
[SCAN TO HDD] key.............................................. 7-5  
[SEARCH] key........................................................ 7-5  
Searching for a file ................................... 7-13 to 7-14  
8-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INDEX  
Troubleshooting  
-Copier operation ................................................ 6-3  
-Document filing function................................... 7-31  
-Finisher/saddle stitch finisher........................... 3-13  
-General information ............................. 2-32 to 2-34  
-Inserter............................................................. 3-18  
Types and sizes of paper ......................... 2-12 to 2-13  
Types and sizes of paper that can be used.......... 2-12  
U  
Upper cover of large capacity tray........................ 1-11  
User maintenance.................................................. 6-2  
User name................................................ 7-24 to 7-26  
W  
Warming up.......................................................... 2-32  
X  
XY Zoom ....................................................... 1-4, 4-18  
Z  
Zoom.................................................................... 4-16  
8
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣➢➣  
Required in IEC-950 (EN 60 950) - Europe  
• The equipment should be installed near an accessible socket outlet for easy disconnection.  
Required in Appendix ZB of BS 7002 (En 60 950) — United Kingdom  
MAINS PLUG WIRING INSTRUCTIONS  
The mains lead of this equipment is already fitted with a mains plug which is either a non-rewireable  
(moulded) or a rewireable type. Should the fuse need to be replaced, a BSI or ASTA approved fuse  
to BS1362 marked  
be used.  
or  
and of the same rating as the one removed from the plug must  
Always refit the fuse cover after replacing the fuse on the moulded plug. Never use the plug without  
the fuse cover fitted.  
In the unlikely event of the socket outlet in your home not being compatible with the plug supplied  
either cut-off the moulded plug (if this type is fitted) or remove by undoing the screws if a rewireable  
plug is fitted and fit an appropriate type observing the wiring code below.  
DANGER: The fuse should be removed from the cut-off plug and the plug destroyed immediately  
and disposed of in a safe manner. Under no circumstances should the cut-off plug be inserted  
elsewhere into a 13A socket outlet as a serious electric shock may occur.  
To fit an appropriate plug to the mains lead, follow the instructions below:  
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:  
GREEN-AND-YELLOW: Earth  
BLUE:  
BROWN:  
Neutral  
Live  
As the colours of the wires in this mains lead may not correspond with coloured markings  
identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:  
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug  
which is marked with the letter E, or by the safety earth symbol Å@, or coloured green or green-  
and-yellow.  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter  
N or coloured black.  
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the  
letter L or coloured red.  
If you have any doubt, consult a qualified electrician.  
WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.  
➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣  
➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢  
➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣ ➢ ➣  
SHARP ELECTRONICS (Europe) GmbH  
Sonninstraße 3, D-20097 Hamburg  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PRINTED IN FRANCE  
TINSE3587GHZZ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sennheiser Video Game Headset ew D1 ME3 User Manual
Sharp Air Cleaner IG A10E User Manual
Sharp Copier AR 153E N User Manual
SIIG Network Card 04 0381A User Manual
Sonance Speaker SA2C User Manual
Sony DVD Player DVP SR150 User Manual
Sony Speaker SA WD200 User Manual
Sony Stereo System CDP CE525 User Manual
SUPER MICRO Computer Computer Hardware H8QG6+ F User Manual
Tanaka Trimmer TST 218 User Manual